JP2022016853A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase interest of a game in a game machine that can be controlled in a relief time reduction.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU 120 can execute a first special suggestion performance of an A mode suggesting that a RAM clear process is not executed, a first special suggestion performance of a B mode, and a first special suggestion performance of a C mode, in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on. The performance mode of the first special suggestion performance is executed at a different ratio according to the number of remaining variation display times (value of the relief time reduction counter) to the variation display to reach a relief time reduction from the 100th variation display after the power is turned on where the first special suggestion performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-10

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of executing a deferred period suggestion effect that is executed according to a period in which a setting change operation is not performed together with a round effect in the first round game in a jackpot game. ing.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-31839 (paragraph 0147)

Regarding a gaming machine that can execute a special suggestion effect (deferred period suggestion effect) that suggests that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized, such as the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1. There was room for improvement because the situation in which the special suggestion effect was executed was not taken into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the special suggestion effect is executed in a gaming machine capable of executing the special suggestion effect suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized. The purpose is to appropriately execute special suggestion effects in consideration of the situation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
An update means (a part of the game control microcomputer 100 in which step 113IWS71 is performed) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction counter) when variable display is executed, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store the numerical information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. Clear processing) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the effect.
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the value of the special condition (relief time reduction counter) becomes ". When "0", that is, reaching the relief time reduction) is established, the special state (time reduction state B) can be controlled.
In the effect executing means (effect control CPU 120), the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is performed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. The numerical information stored in the storage means when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times) after the restart (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on). It is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (first special suggestion effect) that suggests that is not initialized.
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the variable display after the restart is displayed. In the variable display in which the number of executions is the specific number of times, when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes the specific value, the special suggestion effect is restricted (the 100th variation display is executed after the power is turned on). Occasionally, when the relief time is reached, the first special suggestion effect is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special suggestion effect can be appropriately executed in consideration of the situation in which the special suggestion effect is executed.

Further, the other gaming machines according to the present invention are
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
An update means (a part of the game control microcomputer 100 in which step 113IWS71 is performed) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction counter) when variable display is executed, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store the numerical information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. Clear processing) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the effect.
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the value of the special condition (relief time reduction counter) becomes ". When "0", that is, reaching the relief time reduction) is established, the special state (time reduction state B) can be controlled.
In the effect executing means (effect control CPU 120), the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is performed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. The numerical value stored in the storage means when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times) after the restart (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on). It is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (first special suggestion effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized.
It is possible to execute the special suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the number of times the variable display is executed after the number of times the variable display is executed after the restart becomes the specific number of times (relief time reduction in the 100th variable display after the power is turned on). The execution rate of the first special suggestion effect differs depending on the value of the number of times counter)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of variable displays until the special number of times is reached can be predicted depending on the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect, and the interest of the special suggestion effect can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of a change start. (A) and (B) are explanatory views showing the execution presence / absence of the first special suggestion effect and the specific example of the effect mode determination table, and (C) is the explanation showing the specific example of the effect mode determination table of the countdown effect. It is a figure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 1st special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the 1st special suggestion effect is not executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode about each effect when the 1st special suggestion effect is not executed. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect when the 1st special suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode about each effect when the 1st special suggestion effect is executed. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed when the relief time reduction is reached, and (B) is the case where the first special suggestion effect is executed when the relief time reduction is reached. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect of. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode about each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed at the time of reaching the relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode about each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed at the time of reaching the relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding each effect when the play time ends. This is a modification of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode with respect to each effect when the 1st special suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the production stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 2nd special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution presence / absence and the effect mode determination table of the 2nd special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the periodic light emission effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 3rd special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution presence / absence and the effect mode determination table of the 3rd special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 4th special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 4th special suggestion effect execution presence / absence and the effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the 5th special suggestion effect. (A) and (C) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fifth special suggestion effect execution / non-execution and the effect mode determination table, and (B) and (D) are the execution / non-execution of the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 6th special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 6th special suggestion effect execution presence / absence and the effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 7th special suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the execution presence / absence determination table of the 7th special suggestion effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power supply switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. For example, in the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the relief time reduction counter described later stored in the RAM 102, and sets the initial value “900” in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timers, various counters (relief time reduction counters, etc. described later), etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. Is also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature section 07TM]
Next, the feature unit 07TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-36. In the present embodiment, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the big hit occurs, the fluctuation display is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) in a low accuracy state. However, if the next big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to rescue a player who has played a game for a long period of time but has not generated a big hit (for example, to suppress investment in the game). , In this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing when the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (100 times in this example) is executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the big hit occurs. It is possible to carry out a special suggestion effect that suggests that there is no such thing (hereinafter, may be referred to as "deferred").

[Random value]
FIG. 9-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the present embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination are performed on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these values is not limited to this. The range of the random number values MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and ordinary symbols. A variation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns as aspects is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 in the present embodiment includes the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2). In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-2 (C1) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-2 (C2), FIG. 9 -2 (D1) and FIG. 9-2 (D2) include a variation pattern determination table, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

[Display result judgment table]
FIG. 9-1 (B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table in the present embodiment. FIG. 9-1 (B1) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 9-1 (B2) shows the variable special figure. Shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101.

In the present embodiment, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state or time saving state), it is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Is assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability change state). Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 2330 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state or time saving state), it is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1224 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Is assigned to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability change state). Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 2330 are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned.

[Big hit type judgment table]
9-2 (C1) and 9-2 (C2) are explanatory views showing the [for the first special figure] jackpot type determination table and the [for the second special figure] jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-2 (C1) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 9-2 (C2) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to 3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot B, based on the random number (MR2) for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining one of 3R normal jackpot C, 3R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot. Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described.

(3R normal jackpot A)
In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot A" is provided, in which time reduction control is executed over a maximum of 100 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, this "3R normal jackpot A" is also a jackpot in which the probability variation control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game is completed. Further, the jackpot game state by this "3R normal jackpot A" is a jackpot that changes the jackpot to an open state that is advantageous to the player three times (1st to 3rd rounds).

(3R normal jackpot B)
In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot B" is provided, in which time reduction control is executed over a maximum of 200 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, this "3R normal jackpot B" is also a jackpot in which the probability variation control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game is completed. Further, the jackpot game state by this "3R normal jackpot B" is a jackpot that changes the jackpot to an open state that is advantageous to the player three times (1st to 3rd rounds).

(3R normal jackpot C)
In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "3R normal jackpot C" is provided, in which time reduction control is executed over a maximum of 600 variable displays after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, this "3R normal jackpot C" is also a jackpot in which probability variation control is not executed in the variable display after the jackpot game is completed. Further, the jackpot game state by this "3R normal jackpot C" is a jackpot that changes the jackpot to an open state that is advantageous to the player three times (1st to 3rd rounds).

(3R probability change jackpot)
In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "3R probability variation jackpot" in which time reduction control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot gaming state is provided. Further, this "3R probability variation jackpot" is also a jackpot in which probability variation control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, the jackpot game state by this "3R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that changes the jackpot to an open state that is advantageous to the player three times (1st to 3rd rounds).

(10R probability variation jackpot)
In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type, "10R probability variation jackpot" is provided in which time reduction control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, this "10R probability variation jackpot" is also a jackpot in which probability variation control is executed until the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot game state by this "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that changes the jackpot to an open state that is advantageous to the player 10 times (1st to 10th rounds).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming state in which the time saving control is executed until the next big hit occurs after the end of the big hit gaming state is referred to as a time saving state A among a plurality of types of time saving states. ..

In the present embodiment, five types of jackpot types, 3R normal jackpot A to 3R normal jackpot C, 3R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot are provided, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the jackpot type may be 4 or less, or 6 or more.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (C1), in the [for the first special figure] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 89 of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "3R normal jackpot A". 90 to 101 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot B", 102 to 104 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot C", and 105 to 284 are assigned to "3R probability variable jackpot". It is assigned, and 285 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C2), in the [for the second special figure] jackpot type determination table, 0 to 59 in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is "3R normal jackpot A". , 60 to 89 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot B", 90 to 104 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot C", and 105 to 149 are assigned to "3R probability variation jackpot B". , And 150 to 299 are assigned to "10R probability variation jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by the special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for.

[Variation pattern]
9-2 (D1) and 9-2 (D2) are explanatory views showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the present embodiment. FIG. 9-2 (D1) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss, and FIG. 9-2 (D2) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for big hit.

<Variation pattern without reach>
In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern without reach (“non-reach off”) is a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the reach is not established after the fluctuation display is started and the fluctuation display result is “off”. Is a fluctuation pattern that is stopped and displayed.

<Variation pattern with normal reach>
In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the normal reach (“normal reach loss”, “normal reach jackpot”) is the final display without executing the super reach effect (battle effect, etc.) described later after the reach state is established. The result is fixed and stopped.

<Variation pattern with super reach>
In the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns with super reach, in the fluctuation pattern with super reach A (“super reach A off”, “super reach A jackpot”), after the reach state is established, as a super reach A effect. A battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the big hit is won by the battle between the ally character and the enemy character, and the final display result is fixedly stopped after the battle effect is completed. Here, when the final display result is "missing", the effect of defeating the ally character to the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is "big hit", the effect of the ally character winning over the enemy character (victory effect) is executed. If the final display result is "big hit", the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed, and then the effect that the ally character revives and wins the enemy character (revival victory effect) is performed. It may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by super reach, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach B (“super reach B off”, “super reach B jackpot”), after the reach state is established, the super reach B effect is produced. As a result, a super reach B effect (sometimes referred to as a challenge effect) is executed to notify whether or not the ally character has won a big hit by making one attack on the rock. Here, when the final display result is "missing", the effect that the ally character fails in the challenge (failure effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the final display result is "big hit", the effect that the ally character succeeds in the challenge (success effect) is executed. If the final display result is "big hit", the effect that the ally character fails in the challenge (failure effect) is executed, and then the effect that the ally character succeeds in resurrection to the challenge (revival success effect) is executed. You may.

([For off] fluctuation pattern judgment table)
As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D1), in the [for loss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, 1 to 900 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss". 901 to 970 are assigned to the "normal reach out of reach" variation pattern, 971 to 990 are assigned to the "super reach A out of order" variation pattern, and 991 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach out of" variation pattern. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "B off".

([For big hit] Fluctuation pattern judgment table)
As shown in FIG. 9-2 (D2), in the [for big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table, 1 to 50 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach big hit". 51 to 450 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A jackpot", and 451 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot".

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D1) and (D2), the variation pattern with super reach B among the variation patterns with super reach is the variation with super reach A among the variation patterns with super reach. Expectations for big hits are higher than patterns.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-3 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-3, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, there are multiple jackpot types when the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" (predetermined result) and the variable display result is "big hit". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of which type is used (big hit type determination result).

In the variable display result designation command, for example, the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "3R normal big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "3R normal big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "3R normal big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "3R probability variation jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "10R probability variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

Command 8FXH stops (confirms) the variable display of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. It is a symbol confirmation specification command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until it is executed.

In the symbol confirmation designation command, for example, the command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command in which the change of the special symbol ends and the symbol confirmation period becomes 0.5 seconds. The command 8F01H is a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the change of the special symbol is completed and the symbol confirmation period is 15 seconds. The command 8F02H is a symbol confirmation C designation command in which the change of the special symbol is completed and the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability / low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed with the time reduction control. On the other hand, the command 9502H is used as the second game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability / high base state, time reduction state) in which the probability change control is not performed, and the command 9502H is the game state (high probability state) in which the time reduction control is performed and the probability change control is performed. This is the third game state specification command corresponding to (probability / high base state, probability change state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) is determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the big winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data are set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit game state.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the special figure in the second special symbol display device is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to identifiablely display the special figure reserved storage number on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100H is a jackpot start switch passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch.

The command E1XXH is a remaining time reduction notification command for notifying the remaining time reduction control number in the time reduction state (time reduction state A) excluding the relief time reduction.

The command F100H is a right-handed lamp lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed lamp, and the command F101H is a right-handed lamp extinguishing notification command for notifying the turning-off of the right-handed lamp.

The command 9000H is a power-on designation command for designating that the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started.

The command 91XXH is a command for designating the number of times of relief time reduction at the time of restoration, and is an effect control command for designating the value of the number of times of relief time reduction counter at the time of power restoration. In the recovery time reduction count specification command, for example, depending on the value (4 digit value) of the relief time reduction counter value (4 digit value) at the time of power restoration (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit, 4th digit), Different EXT data are set.

The command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command for designating the value of the relief time reduction counter. In the relief time reduction number designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is reached.

The command 98XXH is a recovery game state designation command for designating the game state at the time of power recovery in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the recovery game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9800H is used as the first recovery game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability / low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9801H is the time reduction control. The command 9802H is used as the second recovery game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability / high base state, time reduction state) in which the probability change control is performed but the probability change control is performed and the probability change control is performed. This is the third recovery game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy / high base state, probability change state).

[Game control main processing]
FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the present embodiment. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A control is performed to set a value obtained by converting the value of the current relief time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number and transmit a recovery time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM13), and the process proceeds to step S10 as it is.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery and a command for specifying the number of times of relief time are transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. ..

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step S07TM15). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if a big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times after the RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state B is controlled. Will be done. In this example, since the effect control command instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9 and the initial value (“900”) set in the relief time reduction counter correspond to each other, the CPU 103 performs initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the instruction control command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter (it is "900" in this example), sets the value of the current relief time reduction counter, and issues a recovery time reduction time specification command for effect control. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step S07TM16).

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such an embodiment. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state of continuation of the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is configured not to be initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When the error is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

[Time saving flag, probability change flag]
In the present embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. In the following description, clearing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when the time saving state A via the jackpot is controlled. This time saving flag A is set when the big hit game state of the big hit ends, and when the time saving state A ends (the timing of the big hit during the time saving state A, the specified number of times (100 times, 200 times, 300 times)). It is erased at the timing when the time reduction control of is completed and controlled to the normal state).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B controlled via the relief time saving is controlled. This time saving flag B is set to 900 times of variation display in which the display result does not become a jackpot symbol when the display result is executed 900 times from the RAM clear or in a low accuracy state after the end of the jackpot game state. Is set when is executed, and is erased when the time saving state B ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the time saving state B, the timing when 1000 times of time saving control ends and the time saving state is controlled to the normal state, etc.). ..

The probability change flag is set when the probability change state is controlled. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot ends, the probability variation flag is set as the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation state. This probability change flag is erased at the timing when the probability change state ends (the timing when a big hit occurs during the probability change state, etc.).

[High base flag at recovery]
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game state designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted as an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure transmitted in step S7 of the game control main process. Based on this recovery game state specification command, when the game state at the time of power failure recovery is the high base state (low accuracy / high base state, high accuracy / high base state), the high base flag at the time of restoration can be set. Is.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the high base flag at the time of restoration is set when the game state specified by the game state specification command at the time of restoration is the high base state at the time of restoration of the power failure. This high base flag at the time of restoration is cleared at a predetermined timing (timing when the next big hit occurs, timing when the rescue time is shortened, timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

[Special symbol normal processing]
9-5 and 9-6 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S07TM51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step S07TM52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage counter for counting the second reserved storage is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed on the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step S07TM53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S07TM54).

In the present embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S07TM52 to S07TM54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S07TM55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. And store it in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S07TM56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step S07TM57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step S07TM61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S07TM62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a random number for jackpot determination (see FIGS. 9-1 (B1) and (B2)), and if they match, a process of determining a jackpot is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is not set (if the probability variation state is low), the CPU 103 performs the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for the low probability. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the case of a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a big hit determination using the big hit determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 9-1 (B1) and (B2), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S07TM63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S07TM64). Then, the CPU 103 has a type (3R normal jackpot A, 3R normal jackpot B, 3R normal jackpot C, 3R probability variable jackpot, 10R probability variable jackpot) corresponding to a value corresponding to the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area. ) Is determined as the type of jackpot (step S07TM65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step S07TM66), and proceeds to the process as it is in step S07TM69A. In this case, for example, if it is decided to use the 3R normal jackpot A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be the 3R normal jackpot B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set. If it is decided to be "3" and it is decided to be a 3R normal jackpot C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided to be "4", and if it is decided to be a 3R probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided. If it is decided to be "5" and it is decided to be a 10R probability variation jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6", and if it is decided to be out of the way, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "". -”Is decided.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step S07TM63), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S07TM69A as it is.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step S07TM69A). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step S07TM84. In this example, when the processing of step S07TM69A is executed, the processing after step S07TM70 (particularly the processing of step S07TM71) is not performed when the probabilistic state is in effect, so that when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. Even if the variation display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not subtracted. If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is in a low probability state), the process proceeds to step S07TM70.

In the present embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process proceeds to step S07TM84 without executing the processing after step S07TM70. However, the probability change flag is not limited to such a form. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S07TM70, but the process of step S07TM71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated, the relief time reduction specification command corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (Y in step S07TM70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (Y in step S07TM70), the process proceeds to step S07TM84. When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 at this point, the timing after being already controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the relief time reduction (whether it is controlled to the time reduction state B or the time reduction state B). It is a timing in which the normal state is controlled after 1000 fluctuations are performed in the above state), and a big hit which is an opportunity for 900 to be set in the relief time reduction counter is not generated. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (N in step S07TM70), the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S07TM71). Further, in this example, by executing the process of step S07TM71, it does not matter whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and execute the special suggestion effect, the countdown effect, or the relief time reduction arrival effect described later.

Further, for example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (“900” is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time is configured to be continuously generated, only when the relief time is shortened for the first time. It may be configured to send a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions, and may be configured not to send a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions when the relief time is shortened from the second time onward.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to set a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data and transmit the relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM73).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S07TM74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S07TM85. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state B is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step S07TM75). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS85.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step S07TM85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S07TM86), and ends the process as it is.

[Special symbol stop processing]
9-7 and 9-8 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step S07TM131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (step S07TM132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been done (step S07TM133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the probability change flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the relief time saving determination flag, and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the time saving state if it is set. The time reduction counter is reset (step S07TM134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "900" in the relief time reduction counter (step S07TM135). Therefore, in this example, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and if the next big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display of 900 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, the relief time reduction is performed. It will be controlled to the time saving state B.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step S07TM135, "900" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit and the initial setting is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "900" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED (step S07TM136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command for specifying the start of the right-handed notification to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the big winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are controlled to the open state (fanfare time). Step S07TM139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step S07TM140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S07TM133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (step S07TM170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step S07TM171), resets the time reduction flag if it is set (step S07TM171A), sets the time reduction flag B, and sets the time reduction flag B. It is controlled to shorten the time (step S07TM171B). Then, "1000" is set in the time reduction counter (step S07TM172). Although not shown, in step 113IWS171A, if it is set, the time saving end flag is also reset. Here, the case where the time saving end flag is set is the case where the value of the time saving number counter and the value of the relief time saving counter become 0 in one fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM174). After that, the process ends as it is.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state B at the timing when the relief time is shortened, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving state B may be controlled at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and the relief time reduction counter may be set (“900” is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously generate the relief time reduction, and once the relief time reduction occurs, the time reduction state can be continued until a big hit occurs.

Further, in this example, "900" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode, although the case where the relief time is shortened is shown. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "900". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a relief time reduction.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step S07TM172, 1000 times, which is a value larger than the number of fluctuations (900 times) until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in step S07TM172, the same value as "900" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a smaller value may be set.

Further, in step S07TM172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be configured to be set in the time reduction number counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "1000" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step S07TM172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 1000 times with a probability of 90%. When the number of time reductions is determined by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set in step S07TM170, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction end flag is set (step S07TM141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step S07TM142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (either the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B) and ends the time saving state (step S07TM145). Then, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED (step S07TM150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command for specifying the end of the right-handed notification to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a normal state designation command (a kind of game state designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S07TM152). Then, the process proceeds to step S07TM175.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps S07TM141 to S07TM152, the time saving final variation shifts to the normal state at the end of the symbol fixing period and ends the right-handed notification. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-handed notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the time saving end flag is not set in step S07TM141 (N in step S07TM141), the process proceeds to step S07TM175.

In step S07TM175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S07TM175), and ends the processing as it is.

[First Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing when the fluctuation display of the specified number of times (100 times in this example) is executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the big hit occurs. The first special suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-11), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the effect has not been achieved.

[Processing to determine the effect at the start of fluctuation]
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying a display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying a variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit, miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), change time of special symbol and production contents Based on the fact that one set of commands called the variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, super reach, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special It is possible to specify the fluctuation time of the symbol and the content of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.).

The effect control CPU 120 receives a recovery game state specification command from the game control microcomputer 100 at the time of restoration of the power failure, and is high at the time of recovery when the game state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high base state. It is possible to set the base flag.

In the first embodiment, when the special symbol normal processing corresponding to the variation display of the next special symbol is executed in the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter is M, the relief time reduction is performed in the process of (i) step S07TM71. By setting the number counter to -1, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "M-1", and in the process of (ii) step S07TM73, the value ("M-1") corresponding to the relief time reduction counter is set. A command to specify the number of relief times is sent.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103 in the special symbol normal processing when the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the relief time reduction number in the variation display is received. The value of the counter can be specified.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the special symbol (first special symbol) is used. It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-9 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern for execution based on a command and a variation pattern specification command (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 9-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the power is turned on for the first fluctuation display (step S07TM1000). If the power is turned on and it is not the first fluctuation display (NO in step S07TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1030.

When the power is turned on and the first fluctuation display is performed (YES in step S07TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103. , It is determined whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is "899" (step S07TM1010). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not "899" (NO in step S07TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1030.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "899" (YES in step S07TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special suggestion effect limit flag described later (step S07TM1020), and proceeds to step S07TM1030.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the power is turned on for the 100th variation display (step S07TM1030). If the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is not the 100th time (NO in step S07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1040.

When the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is the 100th time (YES in step S07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special suggestion effect limit flag is set (step S07TM1032). If the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM1032), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1050.

When the special suggestion effect restriction flag is not set (NO in step S07TM1032), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit". (Step S07TM1034). When the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1034), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S07TM1050.

If the display result determined at the start of fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "big hit" (NO in step S07TM1034), the effect control CPU 120 is set with the high base flag at the time of restoration. It is determined whether or not the command is performed (step S07TM1036). When the high recovery base flag is set (YES in step S07TM1036), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1050.

When the high base flag at the time of restoration is not set (NO in step S07TM1036), the effect control CPU 120 sets the table A, that is, [after power-on], indicating whether or not the first special suggestion effect to be described is executed and the effect mode. For the 100th variation] The determination is made based on a table (see FIG. 9-10 (A)) for determining whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode (see FIG. 9-10 (A)) (step S07TM1038), and the process proceeds to step S07TM1050. The mode of the first special suggestion effect will be described in detail in FIG. 9-11, which will be described later.

<[For the 100th variation after turning on the power] Execution / non-execution of the first special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on]. And, according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 has a B mode (blue effect image) at a rate of 40% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “0 to 199” among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution”. It is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the character B) accompanied by, and it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect (character C accompanied by the red effect image) at a rate of 60%. ..

The effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and the B mode (blue effect image) was performed at a rate of 70%. It is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B), and it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect (character C with the red effect image) at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 30%, and the B mode (blue effect image) was performed at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B).

The effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" among the cases where the RAM clear process is "not executed". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 40%, and the B aspect (blue effect image) was executed at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B).

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear process is "executed" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the effect control CPU 120 makes a first special suggestion at a rate of 40%. Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 50%, and decided to execute the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% (blue effect). It is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the character B) accompanied by the image.

In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the initialization designation command is transmitted as the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9 of the game control main process. Based on this initialization specification command, the initialization flag at recovery time can be set. This restoration initialization flag is cleared at a predetermined timing (timing when the next big hit occurs, timing when the rescue time is shortened, timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

If the recovery initialization flag is not set after the determination in step S07TM1010 is YES, the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set, and the process is advanced to step S07TM1030 or later. If the recovery initialization flag is set after the determination is YES in step S07TM1010, the process of setting the special suggestion effect restriction flag is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S07TM1030 or later.

Here, the fact that the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set means that the power is turned off without executing the variable display even once after the RAM clear processing is executed (initialized) at the time of turning on the power. After that, the power was turned on again, and the RAM clear process was not executed when the power was turned on again (as a result, the recovery initialization flag was not set). By skipping the process (step S07TM1038) for determining whether or not to execute the 1 special suggestion effect, the execution of the first special suggestion effect is restricted. This special suggestion effect restriction flag is erased at a predetermined timing (timing when the next big hit occurs, timing when the relief time is reached, timing when the power is turned off, etc.).

Further, when the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is not the 100th time (NO in step S07TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation display is the 100th time after the big hit (that is, transmitted from the CPU 103). Based on the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command, it is determined whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800") (step S07TM1040). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not "800" (NO in step S07TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S07TM1050.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800" instead of the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on (when proceeding with NO in step S07TM1030 → YES in step S07TM1040), it is low after a big hit occurs. This is the case where the fluctuation display is the 100th time after being controlled to a certain state. In the following, this [when the fluctuation display is the 100th time after the big hit is controlled to a low accuracy state] is referred to as [the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit] or [the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit]. It shall be.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800" (YES in step S07TM1040), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command. It is determined whether or not it is a "big hit" (step S07TM1044). When the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1044), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S07TM1050.

If the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "big hit" (NO in step S07TM1044), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed. And the effect mode are determined based on the table A, that is, the table for determining whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode (see FIG. 9-10 (B)). (Step S07TM1048), the process proceeds to step S07TM1050.

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution / non-execution of the first special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table. , A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect and an effect mode is assigned according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the rescue time reduction number designation command.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "no execution" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the effect control CPU 120 makes a first special suggestion at a rate of 70%. Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% (blue effect). Decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of character B) with an image, and decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of mode C (character C with a red effect image) at a rate of 15%. do.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear process is "executed" (at this time, the value of the relief time reduction counter is a fixed value of "800"), the effect control CPU 120 makes a first special suggestion at a rate of 80%. Decided not to execute the effect, decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of the A mode (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 15%, and decided to execute the first special suggestion effect at a rate of 5% (blue effect). Decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of character B) with an image, and decided to execute the first special suggestion effect of mode C (character C with a red effect image) at a rate of 0%. do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10" or less based on the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103. (Step S07TM1050). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not "10" or less (NO in step S07TM1050), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10" or less (YES in step S07TM1050), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the countdown effect, which will be described later, and the table for determining the effect mode of the countdown effect (YES in step S07TM1050). The determination is made based on (see FIG. 9-10 (C)) (step S07TM1060), and the process proceeds to step S07TM1070.

<Table for determining the mode of countdown effect>
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the effect mode determination table for the countdown effect, the effect mode for the countdown effect is determined according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command. Judgment values are assigned.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "n", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is "n more times until the play time".

For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "10", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is "10 more times until the play time", and the relief time reduction counter. When the value of is "0", it is determined that the character information of the countdown display in the countdown effect is "0 more times until the play time".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0" based on the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command transmitted from the CPU 103. (Step S07TM1070). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not "0" (NO in step S07TM1070), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0" (YES in step S07TM1070), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command. It is determined whether or not it is a "big hit" (step S07TM1080). When the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result designated by the display result designation command is a "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1080), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the display result determined at the start of the fluctuation, that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command is not a "big hit" (NO in step S07TM1080), the effect control CPU 120 executes the relief time reduction effect described later. It is determined to be performed (step S07TM1090), and it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute the first special suggestion effect (step S07TM1100).

If it is not decided to execute the first special suggestion effect (NO in step S07TM1100), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the relief time saving arrival effect at the normal timing (step S07TM1110), and as it is. End the process.

When it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect (YES in step S07TM1100), the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the relief time saving arrival effect at a special timing (step S07TM1120), and it is as it is. End the process.

[1st special suggestion production]
In the first embodiment, the timing at which a predetermined time elapses after the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command and the display result designation command (in this example, the variation is determined). The first special suggestion effect can be executed as the special suggestion effect at the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the start. Whether or not this first special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and until the relief time is shortened. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the first special suggestion effect, the character including the effect image is gradually enlarged and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that it is displayed in two sizes. When the first special suggestion effect is executed, (1) first, a character (hereinafter referred to as a character (small)) including an effect image of a small aspect is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and (2). Next (at the timing when 1.5 seconds have passed since the production of (1) was started = the timing when 3.5 seconds have passed since the fluctuation was started), an effect image of a large aspect is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the including character (hereinafter referred to as a character (large)) is displayed.

In the first embodiment, as the first special suggestion effect effect mode, there are a plurality of effect mode in which the characters displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are different. When it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect in the effect determination process at the start of variation, the effect modes of the first special suggestion effect are "A mode", "B mode", and "C mode". It is determined to be one of the production modes.

In the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, it is assumed that the character A including the white effect image (character A (small) 07TM100a, character A (large) 07TM100A) is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect, it is assumed that the character B (character B (small) 07TM100b, character B (large) 07TM100B) including the blue effect image is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect, it is assumed that the character C (character C (small) 07TM100c, character C (large) 07TM100C) including the red effect image is displayed.

In the first embodiment, the character in the first special suggestion effect has a higher display priority than other effect images (decorative pattern, background image, etc.) and can be emphasized more than other effect images. Since it is included, it can be noted that the first special suggestion effect is being executed. The character in the first special suggestion effect is a character different from the character used in the effect image (for example, the character appearing in Super Reach A, Super Reach B, etc.) used in the effect suggesting a big hit (in the effect suggesting a big hit). It is a character that is never used), and by executing the first special suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that a big hit is suggested.

[Special display change effect]
In the first embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), the first background image 07TM210 showing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains as the background image of the decorative pattern. Is displayed, and in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, (A) the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) being executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. A special display corresponding to the number of fluctuations (in this example, the characters "game 0 times", the characters "game 100 times", etc.) is displayed.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a special display is displayed when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy / low base state), but the game state is not limited to such a mode, and the gaming state is shortened. A special display may be displayed when the state is controlled (low accuracy / high base state = time saving state A, time saving state B, time saving state C described later, etc.).

For example, when the character "game 100 times" is shown as the character information of the special display, (A) the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is the 100th time. Or (B), it indicates that the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to a low probability state after the big hit is the 100th time.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute the special display change effect at the timing when the first special suggestion effect is completed as the special suggestion effect. In this special display change effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the display mode of the special display is different, and the effect mode is determined in relation to the effect mode of the first special suggestion effect that was executed immediately before (A mode, A mode, B aspect, C aspect). By changing the display mode of the special display, this special display change effect determines whether or not the RAM clear process is executed at the time of power restoration suggested by the first special suggestion effect, and the number of changes until the relief time is shortened. It is a kind of production that continuously suggests.

In the first embodiment, when the special display change effect is executed, the display mode of the special display is changed over a period until the variable display ends. It should be noted that when the special display change effect is executed, the change is not limited to the configuration in which the display mode of the special display changes over the period until the change display ends, and when the special display change effect is executed, the change is made. The display mode of the special display may change even after the display is completed. For example, when the special display change effect is executed, the display mode of the special display may be changed over a period until the next big hit occurs or a period until the relief time is shortened. In addition, if the display mode of the special display changes depending on the period until the next big hit occurs or the period until the relief time is shortened, the big hit expectation such as Super Reach A or Super Reach B When a high effect is performed, the special display may be hidden or changed to the display mode before the change. Specifically, the special display is hidden or changed to the display mode before the change at the timing of developing into Super Reach A or Super Reach B, and if it becomes a big hit, until the fluctuation ends (or the big hit ends). (Until the next change starts), the display mode before the change or the display may be continued. In case of loss, after notifying the loss of Super Reach A and Super Reach B (battle defeat), the special display is changed at the timing when the background of Super Reach A and Super Reach B returns to the normal background. It may be displayed again in the display mode. In addition, the special display is hidden when performing an effect (relief effect) that once notifies that a loss will occur (after temporarily stopping with a lost symbol) and then changes the symbol again to notify that a big hit will occur. Or, if the display mode is changed to the one before the change, it can be recognized that a big hit will occur before the relief effect is executed. The special display may be displayed again in the display mode after the change at the timing, and may be hidden or changed to the display mode before the change again when the relief effect is executed.

When the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the A aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed at the timing when the first special suggestion effect is completed. The special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 changes to the special display of the A mode. In the special display of the A aspect, the white effect image is displayed around the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character A is displayed behind the special display.

When the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the B aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed at the timing when the first special suggestion effect is completed. The special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 changes to the special display of the B mode. In the special display of the B mode, the blue effect image is displayed around the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character B is displayed behind the special display.

When the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the C aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed at the timing when the first special suggestion effect is completed. .. In the special display change effect of the C mode, unlike the first special display change effect of the A mode and the B mode, the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the special display of the C mode. The special display is an image corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened (in this example, characters such as "800 times left until the play time"). Further, in the special display of the C mode, the red effect image is displayed around the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C is displayed behind the special display.

<Example of the first special suggestion production>
9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect and the special display change effect are executed, and FIGS. 9-11 (2A) to FIG. 9-11. (4A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect and the special display change effect of the A aspect are executed. -11 (2B) to (4B) are descriptions showing an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect and the special display change effect of the B aspect are executed. 9-11 (2C) to (4C) are diagrams, and FIGS. 9-11 (2C) to (4C) are effects displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect and the special display change effect of the C aspect are executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an image.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display area 07TM003 is displaying the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first hold display area is based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 4. The 07TM011 displays four first hold displays 07TM001. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first reserved storage number of 4, the character "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is displayed. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

(When the first special suggestion effect of aspect A is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol by the CPU 103. , Character A (small) 07TM100a is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Character A (small) 07TM100a is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). The display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character A (small) 07TM100a, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3A), at a timing 3.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 gives the first special suggestion of the A aspect. The effect is continuously executed, the character A (small) 07TM100a is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character A (large) 07TM100A is displayed.

Character A (Large) 07TM100A is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). The display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character A (large) 07TM100A, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4A), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect at the timing when the first special suggestion effect should be ended, and the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. While erasing the character A (large) 07TM100A, the special display change effect of the A aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is the special of the A aspect. The display is changed to 07TM150A.

The special display 07TM150A of the A aspect is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbol (the display layer seems to be displayed in the upper position and is displayed in the foreground), and the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect has the display priority over the decorative symbol. It is an image with a high degree (the display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the special display 07TM150A of the A mode and the decorative pattern are displayed in this order.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and the aspect A of the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 The special display 07TM150A is changed to the special display 07TM150.

(When the first special suggestion effect of aspect B is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2B), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol by the CPU 103. , Character B (small) 07TM100b is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Character B (small) 07TM100b is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). The display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character B (small) 07TM100b, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3B), at a timing 3.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 gives the first special suggestion of the B aspect. The effect is continuously executed, the character B (small) 07TM100b is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character B (large) 07TM100B is displayed.

Character B (large) 07TM100B is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). The display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character B (large) 07TM100B, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect at the timing when the first special suggestion effect should be ended, and the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. While erasing the character B (large) 07TM100B, the special display change effect of the B aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is the special of the B aspect. The display is changed to 07TM150B.

The special display 07TM150B in the B aspect is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbol (the display layer seems to be displayed in the upper position and is displayed in the foreground), and the special display 07TM150B in the B aspect has a display priority over the decorative symbol. It is an image with a high degree (the display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character B (large) 07TM100B and the decorative pattern are displayed in this order.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and the B mode at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 The special display 07TM150B is changed to the special display 07TM150.

(When the first special suggestion effect of aspect C is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-11 (2C), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol by the CPU 103. , Character C (small) 07TM100c is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Character C (small) 07TM100c is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). The display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character C (small) 07TM100c, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (3C), at a timing 3.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 gives the first special suggestion of the C aspect. The effect is continuously executed, the character B (small) 07TM100c is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C (large) 07TM100C is displayed.

Character C (large) 07TM100C is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground), and character C (large) 07TM100C has display priority over the decorative symbol. It is an image with a high degree (the display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character C (large) 07TM100C and the decorative pattern are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (4C), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect at the timing when the first special suggestion effect should be ended, and the effect control CPU 120 ends the first special suggestion effect from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. While erasing the character C (large) 07TM100C, the special display change effect of the C aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, and the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is the special of the C aspect. The display is changed to 07TM160C.

The special display 07TM160C in the C aspect is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative symbol (the display layer seems to be displayed in the upper position and is displayed in the foreground), and the special display 07TM160C in the C aspect has a display priority over the decorative symbol. It is an image with a high degree (the display layer is at the top and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the special display 07TM160C of the C mode and the decorative pattern are displayed in this order.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and the C aspect of the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 The special display 07TM150C is changed to the special display 07TM150.

[Countdown production]
In the first embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 to 10, the countdown effect can be executed at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display. This countdown effect is a kind of effect in which the effect mode is determined based on the determination at the start of the change (effect determination process at the start of the change) and suggests the number of changes until the relief time is shortened.

In the countdown effect in the first embodiment, the countdown is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in an manner corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter (in this example, the characters "XX times until play time", XX. = 0 to 10) is displayed.

The countdown display is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the countdown display, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

[Relief time reduction arrival production]
In the first embodiment, when the relief time reduction is reached (variation display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0), the timing at which the fluctuation ends from the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation starts (normal timing and special timing described later). In the period until, it is possible to execute the relief time saving arrival effect. This relief time reduction arrival effect is a kind of effect in which the execution presence / absence is determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (variation start time effect determination process), and it is suggested that the relief time reduction has been reached.

<First stage production, middle stage production, and second stage production in the relief time reduction achievement production>
The relief time reduction effect in the first embodiment is composed of a front stage effect, a middle stage effect, and a rear stage effect.

(Previous stage production in the relief time reduction arrival production)
In the first stage effect in the relief time reduction effect, the first arrival display (gray characters of "play time activation") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first arrival display is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, it seems that the first arrival display, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

In the first embodiment, the first arrival display is an image including gray characters, and the first arrival display has a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image. Regardless of the form, the first arrival display is an image containing semi-transparent characters, and the first arrival display has a lower display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image, or the first arrival display and the decorative pattern. And the display priority may be the same as that of the background image.

(Mid-stage production in the relief time reduction production)
In the middle stage effect (door effect) in the relief time saving effect, first, the first arrival display is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the first arrival display is visually recognized in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The second arrival display (black characters of "play time activation") in a highly characteristic manner is displayed, and the arrival door image (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. To. However, at this time, the arrival door image is an image having a higher display priority than the second arrival display (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image is displayed.

At this time, the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the character "game 900 times" based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being 0) is a special display of the arrival mode. It has changed to 07TM150D (in this example, the character of "game MAX" in an aspect suggesting that the rescue time is controlled to a shortened state). However, at this time, the arrival door image is an image having a higher display priority than the special display (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image is displayed.

Then, the reaching door image (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the area where the reaching door image is not displayed by the animation of the reaching door image in the screen of the image display device 5 (hereinafter referred to as the first specific area), the center portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. It is suggested that a part of the displayed second arrival display (black characters of "play time activation") and the special display 07TM150D at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the rescue time is controlled to a shortened state). The characters (characters of "game MAX") in the mode of the above can be visually recognized.

(Later stage production in the relief time reduction arrival production)
In the latter stage effect in the relief time saving effect, the arrival door image (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and the second arrival display in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The entire (black character of "play time activation") and the special display 07TM150D at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the character of "game MAX" suggesting that the rescue time is controlled to a shorter state. ) And becomes visible, and the relief time reduction arrival effect ends at the timing when the fluctuation display ends.

<Execution timing of relief time reduction arrival production>
In the first embodiment, there are a normal timing and a special timing as the execution (start) timing of the relief time reduction arrival effect. In this example, the normal timing is the timing 2 seconds after the start of the variable display, and the special timing is the timing 6 seconds after the start of the variable display.

In the first embodiment, the relief time reduction arrival effect is generally executed at the normal timing, but as shown in steps S07TM1100, step S07TM1110, and step S07TM1120 of the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, when the relief time reduction is reached. Only when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display of, the relief time reduction arrival effect is executed at a special timing.

In this way, by providing a plurality of execution timings of the relief time reduction arrival effect, the execution timing of the first special suggestion effect (the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display) is standardized in any situation. be able to.

<Example of production of countdown production and reduction of relief time>
FIG. 9-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variation display of the first special symbol (variation display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10). Starts variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. I'm letting you. At this time, the active display area 07TM003 is displaying the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first hold display area is based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 4. The 07TM011 displays four first hold displays 07TM001. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first reserved storage number of 4, the character "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is displayed. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5.

Then, at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the countdown effect, and the countdown display 07TM310 (in this example, "until the play time" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters "10 more times") are displayed.

At this time, based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being 10, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 891 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed.

Next, based on the CPU 103 executing the variation display of the first special symbol (variation display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1 to 9), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the relief time reduction counter to the value of the relief time reduction counter. It is assumed that the countdown effect is executed in the corresponding manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (2), the timing at which 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (variation display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0). Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the countdown effect and displays the countdown display 07TM300 (in this example, the characters "0 more times until the play time") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 900 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (3), at the timing at which the relief time reduction arrival effect should be started (normal timing in this example), the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-stage effect in the relief time reduction arrival effect. The first arrival display 07TM350A (gray characters of "play time activation") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first arrival display is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, it seems that the first arrival display, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (4), at the timing when the middle stage effect (door effect) in the relief time reduction arrival effect should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the middle stage effect in the relief time reduction arrival effect, and the image. The first arrival display 07TM350A is erased from the center of the screen of the display device 5, and the arrival door image 07TM360 (in this example, an image imitating a golden door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases four first hold display areas 07TM001 from the first hold display area 07TM011.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second arrival display 07TM350B (black characters of "play time activation") in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 in a mode having higher visibility than the first arrival display, and the image is displayed. Special display 07TM150D at the lower right of the screen of the display device 5 (in this example, the character "game 900 times" based on the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0) is reached. Then, it is changed to the character (character of "game MAX") of the aspect suggesting that the relief time is controlled to the shortened state. However, the arrival door image 07TM360 is an image having a higher display priority than the second arrival display 07TM350B and the special display 07TM150D of the arrival mode (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that only the arrival door image 07TM360 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (5), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 for a period in which the middle stage effect (door effect) in the relief time reduction arrival effect should be executed. The arrival door image 07TM360 that had been displayed is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the first specific area 07TM360E, a part of the second arrival display (black characters of "play time activation") displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the screen right of the image display device 5. The special display 07TM150D at the bottom (in this example, the character of "game MAX" in a mode suggesting that the relief time is shortened), the active display 07TM003 of the active display area 07TM013, and the background image of the decorative pattern are the first. 1 A part of the background image 07TM210 is visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (6), the effect control CPU 120 erases the arrival door image 07TM360 from the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when the subsequent effect in the relief time reduction arrival effect should be executed. At this time, the entire second arrival display 07TM350B (black characters of "play time activation") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and the special display 07TM150D (in this example, the relief time is shortened) at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The characters of "game MAX" suggesting that the state is controlled), the active display 07TM003 of the active display area 07TM013, and the entire first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern can be visually recognized. It has become.

Then, at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and displays the small symbol of the image display device 5. In the areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the combination of small symbols ("245" in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (7), when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state = play time), the effect control CPU 120 sets the night sky and the moon as the background image of the decorative pattern. The fourth background image 07TM240 including the stars is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "play time" in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the time saving remaining in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, "999 times remaining"). Character) is displayed, and the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 is always displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the special display 07TM150D of the arrival mode from the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0 in the state where the game state is controlled to the time saving state B, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to the player. A special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 that prompts right-handed is displayed.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is 4, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. In the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbols is executed. At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first reserved storage number of 3, the character "3" is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5.

At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol currently being executed is displayed. On the other hand, although the first reserved storage number is 3 based on the fact that the gaming state is controlled to the reduced working hours state B, the first reserved display area 07TM011 does not display the first reserved display.

Next, while the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, one game ball wins a prize in the second start winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed at the timing when the CPU 103 should end the variable display. Is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (8), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variation display of the second special symbol (variation display corresponding to the second hold storage), the effect control CPU 120 has an image. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the display device 5, and the variable display of the small symbol is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. There is. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 erases the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Then, it is assumed that four game balls have won a prize in the second start winning opening while the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a second reserved storage number of 4, the character "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display area 07TM003 is displaying the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area is based on the fact that the second hold storage number is 4. The 07TM012 displays four second hold displays 07TM002.

[Example of effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed]
The execution timing of each effect and an example of the effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in each variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14. In this example, when the first special suggestion effect is not executed, (A) the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out of reach", (B) the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach out of reach", and (C) fluctuation. The case where the pattern is "out of super reach A" will be described.

The case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on is because the (A1) special suggestion effect limit flag is set in the effect determination process at the start of the variation. When the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is skipped (YES in step S07TM1032 → when step S07TM1038 is skipped), (B1) the display result is "big hit", so that the first special suggestion effect When the process of determining whether or not to execute is skipped (YES in step S07TM1034 → when step S07TM1038 is skipped), (C1) the high base flag at the time of restoration is set, so that whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is determined. When the process to be performed is skipped (YES in step S07TM1036 → when step S07TM1038 is skipped), (D1) the special suggestion effect restriction flag is not set, the display result is not "big hit", and the high base flag at the time of recovery. When is not set, the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is executed, but it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect (NO in step S07TM1032 → NO in step S07TM1032 → step S07TM1036). When it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect in NO → step S07TM1038).

Further, in the case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect in the 100th variation display after the big hit, the (B2) display result is "big hit" in the effect determination process at the start of the variation. 1 Execution of the first special suggestion effect when the process of determining whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect is skipped (YES in step S07TM1044 → skips step S07TM1048) and (D2) when the display result is not "big hit". There is a case where the process of determining the presence / absence is executed but it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect (NO in step S07TM1044 → a case where it is decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect in step S07TM1048).

When the first special suggestion effect is not executed in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on and the 100th variation display after the big hit, the above-mentioned (A1) to (D1), and (B2) and (B2) and ( Although there is a case of D2), since the execution timing of each effect and the effect example when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in each variation pattern are common, the time chart and the explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image are common. It is supposed to be.

<Production example in the case of (A)>
FIG. 9-13 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “non-reach off” when the first special suggestion effect is not executed. 14 (1) and (2A) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 , In the symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started. ing. At this time, the active display area 07TM003 is displaying the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first hold display area is based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 4. The 07TM011 displays four first hold displays 07TM001. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first reserved storage number of 4, the character "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is displayed. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2A), the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 9-13 (A)). The effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the final combination of decorative symbols (“245” in this example). Is fixedly stopped. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the final combination of small symbols (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

<Production example in the case of (B)>
FIG. 9-13 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of normal reach" when the first special suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 9-14 is shown. (1) and (2B) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

The effect configuration in FIG. 9-14 (1) is the same as the effect configuration in each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" when the first special suggestion effect is not executed. Is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2B), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the reach state in the variation pattern is established (FIG. 9-13 (B)). (At the timing of T2B shown), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and finally in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns ("212" in this example) is fixedly stopped. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the final combination of small symbols (“212” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

<Production example in the case of (C)>
FIG. 9-13 (C) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of super reach A" when the first special suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 9C is a time chart. -14 (1) and (2C) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

The effect configuration in FIG. 9-14 (1) is the same as the effect configuration in each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" when the first special suggestion effect is not executed. Is omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2C), the CPU 103 is the first in the state of developing into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern (in this example, the defeat effect is executed in the super reach A effect). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variation display of the special symbol (at the timing of T2C shown in FIG. 9-13 (C)) erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013. , The final combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example) is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the final combination of small symbols (“212” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

In the defeat effect, the character "defeat" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 with the image display device 5 displaying the ally character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B.

[Example of effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed]
The execution timing of each effect and an example of the effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed in each variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-15 and 9-16. In this example, among the cases where the first special suggestion effect is executed, (A) when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out of reach", (B) when the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach out of reach", (C) fluctuation. The case where the pattern is "out of super reach A" will be described.

<Production example in the case of (A)>
FIG. 9-15 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “non-reach off” among the cases where the first special suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 9A is a time chart. -16 (1) to (4) and (5A) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (1), based on the fact that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)), the effect control CPU 120 , In the symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and in the small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the small symbol is started. ing. At this time, the active display area 07TM003 is displaying the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the first hold display area is based on the fact that the first hold storage number is 4. The 07TM011 displays four first hold displays 07TM001. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 has a first reserved storage number of 4, the character "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is displayed. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 100 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (2), at the timing 2 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)), The effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, and displays the character A (small) 07TM100a in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Since the layer configuration related to the effect image is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-11, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (3), at the timing 3.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 9-15), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 continuously executes the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, and displays the character A (large) 07TM100A in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Since the layer configuration related to the effect image is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-11, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (4), at the timing when the first special suggestion effect should be ended (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 9-15), the effect control CPU 120 performs the first special suggestion effect. When the process is completed, the character A (large) 07TM100A is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the special display change effect of the A aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed. The special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen is changed to the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect.

Since the layer configuration related to the effect image is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-11, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5A), the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T5A shown in FIG. 9-15 (A)). The effect control CPU 120 ends the special display change effect, and changes the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and combines the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In the example, "212") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

<Production example in the case of (B)>
FIG. 9-15 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of normal reach" in the case where the first special suggestion effect is executed. 16 (1) to (4) and (5B) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

The effect configurations in FIGS. 9-16 (1) to (4) are the same as the effect configurations in each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" when the first special suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIGS. 9-15 (B) are the same as the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIGS. 9-15 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5B), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol in the state where the reach state in the variation pattern is established (FIG. 9-15 (B)). (At the timing of T5B shown), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect, and changes the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150. ..

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and combines the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In the example, "212") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

<Production example in the case of (C)>
FIG. 9-15 (C) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "out of super reach A" in the case where the first special suggestion effect is executed. 9-16 (1) to (4) and (5C) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

The effect configurations in FIGS. 9-16 (1) to (4) are the same as the effect configurations in each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out of reach" when the first special suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIGS. 9-15 (C) are the same as the execution timings (T1 to T4) of each effect in FIGS. 9-15 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (5C), the CPU 103 is the first in the state of developing into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern (in this example, the defeat effect is executed in the super reach A effect). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variation display of the special symbol (at the timing of T5C shown in FIGS. 9-15 (C)) ends the special display change effect and displays the image. The special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of 5 is changed to the special display 07TM150.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and combines the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In the example, "212") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

As described above, the execution timing of the first special suggestion effect in the first embodiment is the same timing regardless of the fluctuation pattern (after the CPU 103 starts the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). It is executed at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed (the timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 9-13 (A) to (C)).

[Execution timing when the first special suggestion effect is not executed when the rescue time is shortened]
The execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in the variation display when the relief time reduction is reached will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-17 (A). FIG. 9-17 (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is not executed in the variation display of reaching the relief time reduction.

In this example, the power is turned off when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, and the 100th fluctuation display is executed with the value of the relief time reduction counter taken over without executing the RAM clear processing when the power is restored. This is an example of the production when

In the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation at this time, it was decided not to execute the first special suggestion effect, and the relief time was reached at the 100th variation after the power was turned on (the value of the relief time reduction counter became 0). Based on this, it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect, and it is decided to execute the relief time reduction arrival effect at the normal timing.

In the first embodiment, the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, but the configuration is not limited to such a form and the relief time reduction is reached. The execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display.

The execution timings other than the timing (T3) for starting the relief time reduction arrival effect shown in FIG. 9-17 (A) are as shown in FIG. 9-17 (B) described later [The first special suggestion effect is executed when the relief time reduction arrival is reached. Since it is the same as the time chart in the case of], the description is omitted.

At the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 9-17, that is, the timing at which the relief time reduction arrival effect should be started (normal timing in this example), the effect control CPU 120 executes the previous stage effect in the relief time reduction arrival effect and displays an image. The first arrival display 07TM350A (gray characters of "play time activation") is displayed in the center of the screen of the device 5. The first arrival display is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, it seems that the first arrival display, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

[Example of effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed when the rescue time is shortened]
The execution timing and the example of the effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variation display when the relief time reduction is reached will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-17 (B), 9-18, and 9-19. 9-17 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variation display of reaching the relief time reduction, and FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19 are shown in FIGS. 9-18 and 9-19. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image which is related to each of these productions.

In this example, the power is turned off when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, and the 100th fluctuation display is executed with the value of the relief time reduction counter taken over without executing the RAM clear processing when the power is restored. This is an example of the production when In the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation at this time, it was decided to execute the first special suggestion effect on the 100th variation after the power was turned on, and the relief time was reached at the 100th variation after the power was turned on (relief time reduction counter). Based on the fact that the value is 0), it is decided to execute the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect, and it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect at the special timing.

Since the effect configuration in FIG. 9-18 (1) is the same as the effect configuration when the CPU 103 shown in FIG. 9-11 (1) starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the effect configuration in FIG. 9-18 (2) is the same as the effect configuration when the countdown effect in the variation display when the value of the relief time reduction counter shown in FIG. 9-12 (2) becomes 0 is executed. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in the effect configuration in FIGS. 9-18 (3) to (5), the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect and the special display change effect of the A aspect shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2A) to (4A) are executed. Since it is the same as the effect configuration at the time of the operation, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (6), at the timing at which the relief time reduction arrival effect should be started (the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), that is, the special timing), the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control CPU 120. The first stage effect in the relief time reduction arrival effect is executed, and the first arrival display 07TM350A (gray characters of "play time activation") is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The first arrival display is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player, it seems that the first arrival display, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

Next, the effect configurations in FIGS. 9-18 (7) and (8) and 9-19 (9) are the middle stage effect and the latter stage in the relief time saving arrival effect shown in FIGS. 9-12 (4) to (6). Since it is the same as the effect configuration when the effect is executed, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this example, since the first special suggestion effect is executed when the relief time is shortened, the effect control CPU 120 is related to the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (8). The special display change effect of the A aspect is executed, and the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is included in the special display 07TM150AD of the A aspect and the reaching aspect (in this example, the characters "game MAX" are included. A white effect image is displayed around the special display, and character A is displayed behind the special display).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command ends the special display change effect. The special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the special display 07TM150AD of the A aspect and the reaching mode to the special display 07TM150D of the reaching mode.

[Example of production at the end of play time]
In the first embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state, it is possible to execute the time saving ending effect suggesting that the time saving state B ends. In the time-saving ending effect, the end door image (in this example, an image imitating a black door) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the first embodiment, the second hold storage is performed during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the normal state and the time saving ending effect is executed (the period in which the end door image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5). The variable display of the second special symbol based on (up to 4) is executed. Next, the variable display of the second special symbol based on all the second reserved storages whose display result is "off" ends, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the end displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completed. The door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. The effect of displaying the end door image at this time as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back shall be executed during the symbol determination period.

At this time, due to the animation of the end door image in the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern of the image display device 5 is displayed only in the area where the end door image is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as the second specific area). The first background image as a background image, the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first hold corresponding to the first hold storage number if the first hold storage number is 1 or more. The display becomes visible.

Next, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends, the time saving ending effect ends, the end door image is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and the normal state as the background image of the decorative symbol of the image display device 5 is supported. The first background image, the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and the first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage number if the first hold storage number is 1 or more. It becomes visible.

Further, during the period when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the end door image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold storage (up to four) is executed. When the display result is "big hit", the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold storage ends, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, it is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The end door image is displayed as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. The effect of displaying the end door image at this time as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back shall be executed during the symbol determination period.

At this time, the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 is limited to the area where the end door image is not displayed (hereinafter referred to as the second specific area) due to the animation of the end door image in the screen of the image display device 5. The jackpot notification image (in this example, the characters "FEVER") that informs that the jackpot will be a jackpot will be visible.

Next, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period ends, the time saving ending effect ends, the end door image is erased from the screen of the image display device 5, and a big hit is notified that the big hit is in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The notification image (in this example, the characters "FEVER") becomes visible.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-5 and 9-6, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step 07TM70), the process of step S07TM75 is skipped. Therefore, it is not controlled by the time saving state B. Therefore, when the time saving state B ends and is controlled to the normal state by executing the variation display 1000 times without executing the variation display in which the display result becomes the "big hit" in the time saving state B, it is normal. Even if the fluctuation display is executed 900 times without executing the fluctuation display in which the display result is "big hit" in the state, the value of the relief time reduction counter remains 0, so that the time reduction state B is controlled. There is no such thing. That is, the time saving state B does not loop.

As described above, in the first embodiment, since the time saving state B does not loop, when the time saving state B is controlled to the normal state after the time saving state B ends, the special display is not displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. do.

An example of each effect at the end of the play time (time reduction state B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-20. FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B and the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the CPU 103 displays the variation of the second special symbol (1000 in the play time). The effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variable display of the second time, has a final combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (in this example). , "245") is fixedly stopped. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the final combination of small symbols (“245” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the fourth background image 07TM240 as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "play time" in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the time saving remaining in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, "remaining 0". The character of "times") is displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the special display 07TM150D (in this example, the characters “game MAX”) of the arrival mode at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number. Since is 4, the character "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the number of second hold storages is 4, the second hold display area 07TM012 displays four second hold displays.

As shown in FIG. 9-20 (2), during the period when the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state and the CPU 103 is executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 has the time saving ending. The effect is executed, and the end door image 07TM365 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

(When all the display results of the second hold memory are "missing")
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3A), the effect of receiving the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (variation display of the fourth second reserved storage). The control CPU 120 definitely stops the final combination of small symbols (“314” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, although the game state is controlled to the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the end door image 07TM365 displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the second specific area 07TM365E, the first background image 07TM210 corresponding to the normal state as the background image of the decorative pattern of the image display device 5 and immediately before in the pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (“314” in this example) whose display result is “off” is visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (4A), at the timing when the symbol determination period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the time saving ending effect and erases the end door image 07TM365 from the screen of the image display device 5. do. At this time, the combination of the first background image 07TM210 corresponding to the normal state as the background image of the decorative symbol of the image display device 5 and the decorative symbol executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. (In this example, "314") is visible.

(If any of the display results of the second hold memory is "big hit")
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3B), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the second special symbol (the variation display of the fourth second hold storage) in which the display result is "big hit". The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command confirms and stops the final combination of small symbols (“777” in this example) in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "777" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, although the game state is controlled to the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the end door image 07TM365 displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as an animation in which the door opens from the front to the back. At this time, only in the second specific area 07TM365E, the big hit notification image 07TM367 (in this example, the character "FEVER") for notifying that the big hit is in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 becomes visible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (4B), at the timing when the symbol determination period ends, the effect control CPU 120 ends the time saving ending effect and erases the end door image 07TM365 from the screen of the image display device 5. do. At this time, the jackpot notification image 07TM367 (in this example, the characters "FEVER") for notifying that the jackpot is in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 becomes visible.

[Modification example when the first special suggestion effect is executed]
In the above first embodiment, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the common timing (the timing 2 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (FIG. 9-15 (A)). )-(C), the first special suggestion effect is executed in)), but it is not limited to such a form, and the fluctuation pattern is different depending on which fluctuation pattern it is. , The first special suggestion effect may be executed.

For example, (A) when the fluctuation pattern is “non-reach out of reach” and (B) when the fluctuation pattern is “normal reach out of reach”, the timing is common (the CPU 103 adopted in the first embodiment). The first special suggestion effect is executed at the timing 2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (the timing of T2 shown in FIGS. 9-15 (A) and (B)]), and (C) When the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach A", the first special suggestion effect may be executed at a timing different from the cases of (A) and (B).

In this modification, when (C) the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach A", the first special suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing after the defeat effect in which the display result is notified in the super reach A effect is executed. It shall be executed.

When the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach A", the execution timing when the first special suggestion effect is executed and a modified example of the effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22. In this modification, among the cases where the first special suggestion effect is executed, the case where (C) the fluctuation pattern is “out of super reach A” will be described.

<Production example in the case of (C)>
FIG. 9-21 (C) is a modified example of a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “out of super reach A” when the first special suggestion effect is executed. Yes, FIG. 9-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the effect image related to each of these effects.

It should be noted that the production images (active display, hold display, special display, decorative design, small design, first) different from the production images related to the super reach A effect, the first special suggestion effect, and the special display change effect shown in FIGS. 9-22. Since the effect configuration in (1 hold storage number, second hold memory number, etc.) is the same as the effect configuration in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 9-16, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-22 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect at the timing when the display result in the fluctuation pattern should be notified (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)). , Notifies that the display result is "off". In the defeat effect, with the image display device 5 displaying the ally character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B, the character "defeat" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example), which suggests that the display result is “off”, is stopped swinging. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (2), at a predetermined timing after the defeat effect for notifying that the display result is “missing” is executed (T6 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)). (At the timing), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, and displays the character A (small) 07TM100a in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Character A (small) 07TM100a is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image related to the defeat effect (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character A (small) 07TM100a, the decorative pattern, and the effect image related to the defeat effect are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (3), the effect control is performed at the timing 1.5 seconds after the start of the first special suggestion effect (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)). The CPU 120 continuously executes the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect, and displays the character A (large) 07TM100A in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

The character A (large) 07TM100A is an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image related to the defeat effect (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character A (large) 07TM100A, the decorative pattern, and the effect image related to the defeat effect are displayed in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (4), at the timing when the first special suggestion effect should be terminated (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)), the effect control CPU 120 is subjected to the first special effect. The suggestion effect is finished, the character A (large) 07TM100A is erased from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the special display change effect of the A aspect related to the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed to display the image. The special display 07TM150 at the lower right of the screen of the device 5 is changed to the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (5), the CPU 103 receives the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing of ending the variation display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 9-21 (C)). The effect control CPU 120 ends the special display change effect, and changes the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 to the special display 07TM150. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol confirmation designation command erases the active display 07TM003 from the active display area 07TM013, and combines the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In the example, "212") is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, when the eye-catching effect (see FIGS. 9-23) is executed when the effect stage described later shifts to a different effect stage, the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The second special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-24), which will be described later, can be executed as the special suggestion effect suggesting that the effect is not achieved.

[Direction stage]
Each production stage (sunny stage, cloudy stage, rain stage) in the second embodiment will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of types of production stages in which the background image of the decorative pattern is different. In the second embodiment, the production stage includes a "sunny stage", a "cloudy stage", and a "rain stage".

In the second embodiment, when the production stage is a sunny stage, a "first background image 07TM210" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as a background image of a decorative pattern, and the production is performed. When the stage is a cloudy stage, the "second background image 07TM220" showing a cloudy landscape including clouds will be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and when the production stage is the rain stage, the background of the decorative pattern. As an image, it is assumed that a "third background image 07TM230" showing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed.

In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the effect stage shifts to the next effect stage every time the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times. The transition of this production stage to the next production stage is referred to as stage change or stage change. In this example, it is assumed that the effect stage shifts to the next effect stage every 25 times of variable display is executed. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the production stage shifts in the order of "sunny stage"-> "cloudy stage"-> "rain stage"-> "sunny stage". Therefore, after shifting to the "sunny stage" and executing 25 fluctuation displays, the screen shifts to the "cloudy stage", and after shifting to the "cloudy stage" and performing 25 fluctuation displays, the "rain stage" is performed. After shifting to the "rain stage" and executing the fluctuation display 25 times, the transition to the "sunny stage" is performed.

[Eye catch production]
In the second embodiment, the eye-catching effect can be executed when shifting from the currently controlled effect stage to the next effect stage. This eye-catching effect is performed at the timing immediately before the end of the variation display when the 25th variation display is executed in the currently controlled effect stage (for example, the timing 2 seconds before the end of the variation display). By displaying the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to the currently controlled production stage is once lowered, and then the next production stage is supported. It is a kind of effect to display the background image of the decorative pattern.

The eye-catching image in the second embodiment is not related to the display result such as the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (characters of "FEVER ZZ" in this example) and the model character (character Z in this example). Information is included, and information that causes a misunderstanding that it is a notice effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled by a big hit is not included.

[Production stage and eye-catching production example]
An example of an effect when an eye-catching effect is executed when various effect stages are changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-23. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

In addition, the effect configuration in the various effect images (active display, hold display, special display, decorative pattern, small symbol, first hold storage number, second hold storage number, etc.) shown in FIGS. 9-23 is the above-mentioned first. Since it is the same as the effect configuration in the embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (1), when the effect stage is controlled to the sunny stage, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variation display is executed after the effect stage is controlled to the sunny stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (3), when the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the cloudy stage, the second background image 07TM220 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variation display is executed after the effect stage is controlled by the cloudy stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect stage to the rain stage, the third background image 07TM230 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Next, it is assumed that the 25th variation display is executed after the effect stage is controlled by the rain stage.

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), when the effect stage is controlled to the sunny stage, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

[Second special suggestion production]
In the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the low accuracy state when (A) the 100th fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) after the big hit. When the 100th variation display is being executed, the second special suggestion effect can be executed as the special suggestion effect while the eye-catching effect is being executed. Whether or not this second special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and until the relief time is shortened. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the second special suggestion effect, characters (character A, character B, character C) suggesting whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed at the time of power restoration and the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened are superimposed and displayed on the eye-catching image. .. It is assumed that the characters (characters A to C) used in the second special suggestion effect are different from the characters included in the eye-catching image (character Z in this example). The characters (characters A to C) are images having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the characters (characters A to C) and the eye-catching image are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

In the second embodiment, as the second special suggestion effect effect mode, there are a plurality of effect mode in which the characters displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are different. As the production mode of the second special suggestion effect, there are "A mode", "B mode", and "C mode".

In the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect, it is assumed that the character A (character A (small) 07TM100a) including the white effect image is displayed.

In the second special suggestion effect of the B aspect, it is assumed that the character B (character B (small) 07TM100b) including the blue effect image is displayed.

In the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect, it is assumed that the character C (character C (small) 07TM100c) including the red effect image is displayed.

[Production example of the second special suggestion production]
An example of the effect when the second special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-24. FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

In this example, FIG. 9-24 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the second special suggestion effect is not executed while the eye-catching effect is executed, and FIG. 9-24 (2A) shows. Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed while executing the eye-catching effect. FIG. 9-24 (2B) shows the eye-catching effect and the eye-catching effect. , Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the second special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, and FIG. 9-24 (2C) shows the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect while executing the eye-catching effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image at the time of executing.

Since the effect configuration shown in FIG. 9-24 (1) is the same as the effect configuration when the effect stage shown in FIG. 9-23 (1) is a sunny stage, the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the effect configuration in the various effect images (active display, hold display, special display, decorative pattern, small symbol, first hold storage number, second hold storage number, etc.) shown in FIGS. 9-24 is the above-mentioned first. Since it is the same as the effect configuration in the embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(When the second special suggestion effect is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (2), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Display.

(When the second special suggestion effect of aspect A is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed, and the character A (small) 07TM100a is superimposed and displayed on the lower left of the eye-catching image 07TM400 in the image display device 5.

The character A (small) 07TM100a is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it seems to the player that the character A (small) 07TM100a and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order from the front to the back.

(When the second special suggestion effect of aspect B is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2B), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, and the character B (small) 07TM100b is superimposed and displayed on the lower left of the eye-catching image 07TM400 in the image display device 5.

The character B (small) 07TM100b is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character B (small) 07TM100b and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order.

(When the second special suggestion effect of aspect C is executed)
As shown in FIG. 9-24 (2C), the effect control CPU 120 executes the eye-catching effect at the timing when the eye-catching effect should be executed, and displays the eye-catching image 07TM400 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, and the character C (small) 07TM100c is superimposed and displayed on the lower left of the eye-catching image 07TM400 in the image display device 5.

The character C (small) 07TM100c is an image having a higher display priority than the eye-catching image 07TM400 (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character C (small) 07TM100c and the eye-catching image 07TM400 are displayed in this order.

<[For the 100th variation after turning on the power] Execution / non-execution of the second special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), whether or not the second special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on]. And, according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 has a B mode (blue effect image) at a rate of 40% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “0 to 199” among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution”. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B) accompanied by, and it is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect (character C accompanied by the red effect image) at a rate of 60%. ..

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and the B aspect (blue effect image) was executed at a rate of 70%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B), and it is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect (character C with the red effect image) at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 30%, and the B aspect (blue effect image) was executed at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B).

The effect control CPU 120 performs the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" among the cases where the RAM clear process is "not executed". It was decided not to execute it, and it was decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect (character A with the white effect image) at a rate of 30%, and the B aspect (blue effect image) was executed at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the accompanying character B).

The effect control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to perform the second special suggestion effect of aspect A (character A with white effect image) at a rate of 50%, and aspect B (with blue effect image) at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B).

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution / non-execution of the second special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-25 (B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] whether or not the second special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table. , A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestion effect and an effect mode is assigned according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the rescue time reduction number designation command.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% when the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to perform the second special suggestion effect of aspect A (character B with white effect image) at a rate of 5%, and aspect B (with blue effect image) at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B), and it is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect (character C with the red effect image) at a rate of 5%.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the second special suggestion effect at a rate of 80% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to perform the second special suggestion effect of aspect A (character B with white effect image) at a rate of 15%, and aspect B (with blue effect image) at a rate of 5%. It is decided to execute the second special suggestion effect of the character B).

[Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, when the periodic light emission effect (see FIGS. 9-26) described later is executed, the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, which will be described later as a special suggestion effect. The third special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-27) is feasible.

[Periodic emission production]
In the third embodiment, (A) the 100 × Nth variation display (N is an integer of 1 or more) is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) the low accuracy after the big hit. When the 100 × Nth variation display is executed after being controlled to the state, a periodic light emission effect is executed in which the main lamp 9a provided at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits white light. It is possible. This periodic light emission effect can be executed at the start of the fluctuation at the time of (A) or (B), and is a kind of effect suggesting the number of fluctuations.

An example of the effect when the periodic light emission effect is executed after the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-26. FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a time chart and an effect image showing execution timings related to each of these effects.

In this example, an effect example is shown when the periodic light emission effect is executed in the 100th, 200th, and 300th variation displays after the power is turned on and controlled to a low accuracy state.

As shown in FIGS. 9-26, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 has a cycle. A light emission effect is executed, and the main lamp 9a is made to emit white light.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 200th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 executes the periodic light emission effect to perform the main. The lamp 9a is made to emit white light.

Next, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 300th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 executes the periodic light emission effect to perform the main. The lamp 9a is made to emit white light.

[Third special suggestion production]
In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the low accuracy state when (A) the 100th fluctuation display is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) after the big hit. When the 100th variation display is executed, the third special suggestion effect can be executed as the special suggestion effect at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed. Whether or not this third special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and until the relief time is shortened. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations. In the third special suggestion effect, the main lamp 9a provided at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 is made to emit light.

In the third embodiment, as the third special suggestion effect effect mode, there are a plurality of effect mode in which the emission color of the main lamp 9a is different. As the production mode of the third special suggestion effect, there are "emission color: blue", "emission color: green", and "emission color: red".

Emission color: In the third special suggestion effect of blue, it is assumed that the main lamp 9a provided at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits blue light. In the following, the third special suggestion effect of emission color: blue may be described as the third special suggestion effect [blue].

Emission color: In the third special suggestion effect of green, it is assumed that the main lamp 9a provided at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits green light. In the following, the third special suggestion effect of emission color: green may be described as the third special suggestion effect [green].

Emission color: In the third special suggestion effect of red, it is assumed that the main lamp 9a provided at the upper position of the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 emits red light. In the following, the third special suggestion effect of emission color: red may be described as the third special suggestion effect [red].

In the third embodiment, (A) when the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) 100 times after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. The configuration was such that the third special suggestion effect could be executed when the second variation display was executed, but the configuration is not limited to such a form, but at other timings. The third special suggestion effect may be executed.

For example, in the third embodiment, the fluctuation display of ((A) 100 × N times (N is an integer of 1 or more) after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is displayed at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed. The third special suggestion effect may be executed when it is executed, or (B) when the 100 × Nth variation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state after the big hit.

[Production example of the third special suggestion production]
An example of the effect when the third special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-27. 9-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a time chart and an effect image showing execution timings related to each of these effects.

In this example, an effect example is performed when the periodic light emission effect is executed without executing the third special suggestion effect in the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, and the low accuracy state after the power is turned on. The third special suggestion effect is executed in the 100th variation display after being controlled to, and an example of the effect when the periodic light emission effect is not executed is shown.

(When the third special suggestion effect is not executed)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 has a cycle. The light emission effect is executed, and the main lamp 9a is made to emit white light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [blue] is executed)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the third. 3 Execute the special suggestion effect [blue] to make the main lamp 9a emit blue light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [green] is executed)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the third. 3 Execute the special suggestion effect [green] to make the main lamp 9a emit green light.

(When the third special suggestion effect [red] is executed)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27, at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the third. 3 Execute the special suggestion effect [red] to make the main lamp 9a emit red light.

<[For 100 fluctuations after turning on the power] Execution / non-execution of the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-28 (A), whether or not the third special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on]. And, according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the relief time reduction number designation command, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 has a third special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 199" among the cases where the RAM clear process is "not executed" or not. It is decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [red] at a rate of 60%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 399" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". Decided not to execute (that is, execute the periodic light emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 70%. ] Is decided to be executed, and it is decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [red] at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "400 to 699" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". Decided not to execute (that is, execute the periodic light emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 30%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 50%. ] Is decided to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". Decided not to execute (that is, execute the periodic light emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 30%. ] Is decided to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to (that is, execute the periodic emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 50%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 10%. Decide to run.

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution / non-execution of the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-28 (B), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] whether or not the third special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table. , A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and an effect mode is assigned according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the rescue time reduction number designation command.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to (that is, execute the periodic emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 10%. Is decided to be executed, and it is decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [red] at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the third special suggestion effect at a rate of 80% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decided not to (that is, execute the periodic emission effect), decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [blue] at a rate of 15%, and decided to execute the third special suggestion effect [green] at a rate of 5%. Decide to run.

In the third special suggestion effect, (A) when the fluctuation display is executed 100 × N times (N is an integer of 1 or more) after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) after a big hit. When the 100 × Nth variation display is executed after being controlled to the low probability state (that is, at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed), the process of determining whether or not the third special suggestion effect is executed is executed. However, a configuration capable of executing the second special suggestion effect may be adopted. Therefore, every 100 fluctuations, a process of determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect is executed, and the third special suggestion effect can be executed.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, when the first variation display after the power is turned on is executed, the fourth embodiment will be described later as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-29) can be performed.

[4th special suggestion production]
In the fourth embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to a low accuracy state when the power is turned on, as a special suggestion effect for a predetermined period from the time when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on is executed. The fourth special suggestion effect can be executed. Whether or not this fourth special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of fluctuation), whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and until the rescue time is shortened. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the fourth embodiment, the effect stage in the normal state becomes a sunny stage, and the "first background image 07TM210" showing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. In the 4th special suggestion effect, the effect stage in the normal state becomes the volcano stage for a predetermined period from the time when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on, and the landscape of the volcano including the volcano is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The displayed "fifth background image 07TM250" is displayed.

In the fourth embodiment, as the fourth special suggestion effect effect mode, there are a plurality of effect mode with different execution periods. As the production mode of the fourth special suggestion effect, there are "execution period: 10 fluctuations", "execution period: 20 fluctuations", and "execution period: 25 fluctuations".

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestion production of 10 fluctuations, the production stage becomes a volcanic stage from the time when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on to the end of the 10th fluctuation display, and the background image of the decorative pattern. The fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed as. In the following, the fourth special suggestion effect of execution period: 10 variation may be described as the fourth special suggestion effect [10 variation].

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestion production of 20 fluctuations, the production stage becomes a volcanic stage from the time when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on to the end of the 20th fluctuation display, and the background image of the decorative pattern. The fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed as. In the following, the fourth special suggestion effect of execution period: 20 variation may be described as the fourth special suggestion effect [20 variation].

Execution period: In the 4th special suggestion production of 25 fluctuations, the production stage becomes a volcanic stage from the time when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on to the end of the 25th fluctuation display, and the background image of the decorative pattern. The fifth background image 07TM250 is displayed as. In the following, the fourth special suggestion effect of execution period: 25 variation may be described as the fourth special suggestion effect [25 variation].

[Production example of the 4th special suggestion production]
An example of the effect when the fourth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-29. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

In the fourth embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command that specifies that the customer is in the customer waiting state, the customer waiting demo effect in which the demo image 07TM500 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. (See FIG. 9-29 (1)).

In this example, it is controlled to the normal state when the power is turned on, the first fluctuation display is not executed after the power is turned on, and the start prize is generated and the power is turned on while the customer waiting demo effect is being executed. It is assumed that the first fluctuation display of is executed.

In this example, an effect example when the fourth special suggestion effect is not executed in the first variation display after the power is turned on, and an effect when the fourth special suggestion effect is executed in the first variation display after the power is turned on. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-29 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes a customer waiting demo effect and displays the demo image 07TM500 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 07TM500 includes a ally character, characters of "demo video", and a notification image (in this example, an image in which the characters "play time is installed" are displayed on a triangular object). There is.

(When the 4th special suggestion effect is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2A), when a new start prize is generated and the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation display after the power is turned on), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 ends the customer waiting demo effect, erases the demo image 07TM500 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the first background image 07TM210 as the background image of the decorative pattern.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of small symbols has started. At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 001 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

(When the 4th special suggestion effect is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (2B), when a new start prize is generated and the CPU 103 starts the variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation display after the power is turned on), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 ends the customer waiting demo effect, erases the demo image 07TM500 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, executes the fourth special suggestion effect, and displays the fifth background image 07TM250 as the background image of the decorative pattern. Display.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of small symbols has started. At this time, in the active display area 07TM013, the active display 07TM003 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

At this time, since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "0" in the first reserved storage number display area 07TM041 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number. Is 0, so that the character "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number display area 07TM042 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a special display 07TM150 (in this example, the characters "game 001 times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

<[For the first fluctuation after turning on the power] Execution / non-execution of the fourth special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-30, in the [for the first variation after the power is turned on] execution / non-execution of the fourth special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table, the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command and the relief. A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fourth special suggestion effect and an effect mode is assigned according to the value of the relief time reduction counter specified by the time reduction number designation command.

The effect control CPU 120 has a fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 40% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 199" among the cases where the RAM clear process is "not executed" or not. It is decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [25 variation] at a rate of 60%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 10% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “200 to 399” among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution”. Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [10 fluctuation] at a rate of 5%, and decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [20] at a rate of 70%. It is decided to execute [variation], and it is decided to execute the fourth special suggestion effect [25 variation] at a rate of 15%.

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 20% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “400 to 699” among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “no execution”. Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [10 fluctuation] at a rate of 30%, and decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [20] at a rate of 50%. Decide to execute [Variation].

The effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" among the cases where the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is "no execution". Decided not to execute (that is, control to the sunny stage), decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [10 fluctuation] at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the 4th special suggestion effect [20] at a rate of 30%. Decide to execute [Variation].

The effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth special suggestion effect at a rate of 100% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Decide not to (ie, control to the sunny stage).

Even when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear processing is "execution", it may be decided to execute the fourth special suggestion effect. Further, when the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear process is "executed", the execution rate of the fourth special suggestion effect of each effect mode may be different depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, (A) the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) the 100th variation after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. When the display is executed, when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established, the game should be executed at the timing when the normal dialogue advance notice effect (see FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C)) described later should be executed. As a special suggestion effect that suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the machine, the fifth special suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-31 (2D)) described later can be executed.

[Normal dialogue notice production]
In the fifth embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by reach (that is, the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach loss", "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A miss", "super reach A jackpot", " At a predetermined timing after the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established (in this example, 1 second has passed since the reach was established) in the fluctuation pattern of either "super reach B off" or "super reach B jackpot"). (At the timing), it is possible to execute a normal dialogue notice effect that suggests (notice) the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this normal serif notice effect, the character D and the normal serif display among the serif displays are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

This serif display is a balloon-shaped image including character information corresponding to the content spoken by the character D. Of the serif display, in the normal serif display, it is assumed that the character information corresponding to the content suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is included as the content spoken by the character D.

In the fifth embodiment, there are a plurality of production modes in which the character information of the dialogue display is different as the production mode of the normal dialogue notice effect. There are "chance mode", "super heat mode", and "FEVER mode" as the production mode of the normal dialogue notice effect.

In the normal dialogue notice effect of the chance mode, the character D, the normal dialogue display (in this example, the character "chance ??" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is low), and the character D are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed. In the following, the normal dialogue advance notice effect of the chance mode may be described as the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance].

In the normal dialogue notice production of the intense heat mode, the character D and the normal dialogue are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "extreme heat !!" suggesting that the big hit expectation is high). And are displayed. In the following, the normal dialogue notice effect of the intense heat mode may be described as the normal dialogue advance notice effect [extreme heat].

In the normal dialogue advance notice effect of the FEVER mode, the character D and the normal dialogue display (in this example, "FEVER !!" suggesting that it is confirmed to be a big hit" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Character) and are displayed. In the following, the normal dialogue advance notice effect of the FEVER mode may be described as the normal dialogue advance notice effect [FEVER].

[Fifth special suggestion production]
In the fifth embodiment, (A) the 100th variation display is executed after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) the 100th variation after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. When the display is executed, when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with reach (that is, when the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach loss", "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A miss", "super reach A jackpot", When the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established in any of the fluctuation patterns of "super reach B off" and "super reach B jackpot"), a predetermined value after the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established. At the timing (in this example, one second after the reach is established), the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed as the special suggestion effect.

Whether or not this fifth special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined based on the determination at the start of the fluctuation (effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation), whether or not the RAM clear process is executed when the power is restored, and until the relief time is shortened. It is a kind of production that suggests the number of fluctuations.

In the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect, and only when it is determined not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the normal dialogue advance notice effect.

In this fifth special suggestion effect, the character D and the special serif display among the serif displays are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the special dialogue display, it is assumed that the character information corresponding to the content suggesting that the RAM clear processing is not executed at the time of power restoration is included as the content spoken by the character D. In this example, it is assumed that the characters "deferred !?" are displayed as the character information of the special dialogue display.

In the fifth embodiment, the character D uses a common effect image in the fifth special suggestion effect and the normal advance notice effect, and the content suggested by the character information in the dialogue display is different. The dialogue display of the fifth special suggestion effect suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed at the time of power restoration, and the dialogue display of the normal dialogue notice effect suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. In the following, the fifth special suggestion effect may be described as a special dialogue notice effect.

[Production example of the 5th special suggestion production]
An example of the effect when the fifth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31. FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. 9-31 (2A) to (2C) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image related to each effect when the fifth special suggestion effect is not executed, but the normal dialogue advance notice effect is executed. 9-31 (2D) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each effect when the fifth special suggestion effect is executed and the normal dialogue advance notice effect is not executed.

In this example, the fluctuation pattern is (A) the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. It is assumed that the variation display is executed when the variation pattern is accompanied by reach.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31 (1), the CUP 103 is executing the variation display of the first special symbol, and the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is executed. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

In addition, the effect configuration in various effect images (active display, hold display, special display, first hold storage number, second hold storage number, background image, etc.) shown in FIGS. 9-31 is the above-mentioned first embodiment. Since it is the same as the effect configuration of FIG. 9-11, the description thereof will be omitted.

(Example of production when normal dialogue notice production [chance] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2A), at the timing when the reach state is established and 1 second has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance], and the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM101 (in this example, the characters "chance ??") are displayed in the central portion.

The character D07TM100D and the normal serif display 07TM101 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM101, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

(Example of production when normal dialogue notice production [super heat] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2B), at the timing when the reach state is established and 1 second has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [extreme heat], and the image display device 5 is used. In the center of the screen, the character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM102 (in this example, the characters "super heat !!") are displayed.

The character D07TM100D and the normal serif display 07TM102 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM102, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

(Example of production when normal dialogue notice production [FEVER] is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2C), at the timing when the reach state is established and 1 second has elapsed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [FEVER], and the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The character D07TM100D and the normal dialogue display 07TM103 (in this example, the characters "FEVER !!") are displayed in the central portion.

The character D07TM100D and the normal serif display 07TM103 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character D07TM100D, the normal dialogue display 07TM103, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

(Example of production when the 5th special suggestion production is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fifth special suggestion effect at the timing when the reach state is established and one second has elapsed, and the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The character D07TM100D and the special dialogue display 07TM104 (in this example, the characters "deferred !?") are displayed.

The character D07TM100D and the special serif display 07TM104 are images having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and the background image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the front to the back, it seems to the player that the character D07TM100D, the special dialogue display 07TM104, the decorative pattern, and the background image are displayed in this order.

<[For 100 fluctuations after turning on the power] 5th special suggestion effect execution / non-execution and effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (A), whether or not the 5th special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on]. A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned according to the above.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 800"), the effect control CPU 120 is the fifth special at a rate of 20%. It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect, and it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 80%.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"), the effect control CPU 120 has a fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 40%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 60%.

<Execution / non-execution of normal dialogue notice production and production mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on] In the normal dialogue advance notice effect execution / non-execution and effect mode determination table, it is normal according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment values for determining whether or not to execute the dialogue advance notice effect and the effect mode are assigned.

When the display result is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue advance notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance] at a rate of 55%. It is decided to decide to perform the normal dialogue notice production [super heat] at a rate of 5%.

When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue advance notice effect at a rate of 20%, and executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance] at a rate of 60%. It is decided that the normal dialogue warning effect [Fever] will be executed at a rate of 15%, and the normal dialogue warning effect [FEVER] will be executed at a rate of 5%.

<[For the 100th variation after the big hit] Execution / non-execution of the 5th special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (C), whether or not the 5th special suggestion effect is executed and whether or not the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed in the effect mode determination table [for the 100th variation after the big hit]. Correspondingly, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"), the effect control CPU 120 has a fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 50%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 50%.

When the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "executed" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "800"), the effect control CPU 120 has a fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 70%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the fifth special suggestion effect at a rate of 30%.

<Execution / non-execution of normal dialogue notice production and production mode determination table>
As shown in FIG. 9-32 (D), [for the 100th variation after the big hit] in the normal dialogue advance notice effect execution presence / absence and the effect mode determination table, the normal dialogue is performed according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment values for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect mode are assigned.

When the display result is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue advance notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance] at a rate of 55%. It is decided to decide to perform the normal dialogue notice production [super heat] at a rate of 5%.

When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the normal dialogue advance notice effect at a rate of 20%, and executes the normal dialogue advance notice effect [chance] at a rate of 60%. It is decided that the normal dialogue warning effect [Fever] will be executed at a rate of 15%, and the normal dialogue warning effect [FEVER] will be executed at a rate of 5%.

As shown in FIGS. 9-32 (B) and (D), the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of normal dialogue notice production [chance] <normal dialogue notice production [fierce heat] <normal dialogue notice production [FEVER]. ing. In addition, the normal dialogue advance notice effect [FEVER] is a big hit confirmation effect that is confirmed to be a big hit.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is "out of normal reach", the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed to notify the display result. At the timing, the sixth special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-33 (2B) and (3B)) described later can be executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. Is.

In the sixth embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the display result is "" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the display result in the fluctuation pattern is notified. The combination of decorative symbols that is "off" is stopped and displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 when the reach state is reached is "7", the display is always super reach. It shall develop. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 when the reach state is reached is different from "7". There are different types of decorative patterns ("1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"). In the following, a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 when the reach state is reached may be described as a reach symbol.

In the sixth embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "out of alignment" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At that time, it is assumed that a decorative symbol of a type different from "7" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5C. In the following, the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C may be described as a medium symbol.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the reach symbol is a decorative symbol other than "7" ("2", etc.), and when notifying that the display result is "out of reach", "7". ”And decorative symbols other than the reach symbol (“ 2 ”) shall be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

[6th special suggestion production]
In the sixth embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is "normal reach loss", the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the display result is "missing". It is possible to execute the sixth special suggestion effect, which will be described later, as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing of notifying that.

In this sixth special suggestion effect, the decorative symbol of "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 at the timing when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed to notify that the display result is "off". It shall be stopped and displayed in the emphasized mode (in this example, the enlarged mode).

[Production example of the 6th special suggestion production]
An example of the effect when the sixth special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-33. 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. 9-33 (2A) and (3A) show a combination of decorative symbols whose display results are "off" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 without executing the sixth special suggestion effect. Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each effect when is stopped and displayed, and FIGS. 9-33 (2B) and (3B) show that the sixth special suggestion effect is executed and the image display device 5 is used. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image related to each effect when the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

In this example, (A) it is the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on, and the fluctuation display is executed when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of "out of normal reach". do.

Since the effect configuration in FIG. 9-33 (1) is the same as the effect configuration in FIG. 9-31 (1) when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern is established, the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the effect configuration in the various effect images (active display, hold display, special display, first hold storage number, second hold storage number, background image, small symbol, etc.) shown in FIGS. 9-33 is the above-mentioned first. Since it is the same as the effect configuration of FIG. 9-11 in the embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

(When the 6th special suggestion effect is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (2A), at the timing when the combination of decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed to notify that the display result is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5C, the decorative symbol of "1" is stopped and displayed (rocking stop). That is, the combination of decorative symbols (“212” in this example) whose display result is “off” is stopped and displayed (swing stop).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (3A), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, displays the small symbol of the image display device 5. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols ("212" in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

(When the 6th special suggestion effect is executed)
Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (2B), at the timing when the combination of decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed to notify that the display result is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 has the sixth special suggestion effect. Is executed, and in the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol of "7" is emphasized and stopped and displayed (rocking stop). That is, the combination of decorative symbols (“272” in this example) whose display result is “off” is stopped and displayed (swing stop).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (3B), the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation designation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variation display of the first special symbol, displays the small symbol of the image display device 5. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols (“272” in this example) is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

<[For the 100th variation after turning on the power] Execution / non-execution of the 6th special suggestion effect and the effect mode determination table>
As shown in FIGS. 9-34, [for the 100th variation after the power is turned on] In the 6th special suggestion effect execution / non-execution and the effect mode determination table, the RAM clear process specified by the initialization specification command is executed or not. , A determination value for determining whether or not to execute the sixth special suggestion effect and the effect mode is assigned.

The effect control CPU 120 is the sixth special at a rate of 20% when the presence / absence of execution of the RAM clear processing is "no execution" (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 800"). It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (other than "7" is stopped in the middle symbol), and it is decided to execute the sixth special suggestion effect ("7" is stopped in the middle symbol) at a rate of 80%.

The effect control CPU 120 has a sixth special suggestion effect at a rate of 70% when the execution / non-execution of the RAM clear process is “executed” (when the value of the relief time reduction counter is “800”). Is decided not to be executed (other than "7" is stopped in the middle symbol), and it is decided to execute the sixth special suggestion effect at a rate of 30% ("7" is stopped in the middle symbol).

[7th Embodiment]
In the seventh embodiment, when the display result is "missing" even though the effect with high expectation of big hit (gold active change effect described later) is executed, the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. A seventh special suggestion effect (see FIGS. 9-35), which will be described later, can be executed as a special suggestion effect that suggests that the process has not been executed.

[Active change production]
In the seventh embodiment, when a start prize corresponding to the 100th variation display after the power is turned on occurs, the final display mode of the active display is the final display mode of the [100th variation after the power is turned on] active display. It can be determined based on the determination table (see FIGS. 9-36). When the final display mode of the active display is different from the normal mode, the active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, it is possible to execute the blue active change effect that changes the active display to the blue mode, and the final display mode of the active display is the red mode. In some cases, it is possible to execute a red active change effect that changes the active display to a red mode, and if the final display mode of the active display is a gold mode, a gold active change effect that changes the active display to a gold mode. Is feasible.

In the seventh embodiment, when the gold active change effect is executed and the active display of the gold mode is displayed, the active display of the display mode (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) other than the gold mode is displayed. It is assumed that the expectation of a big hit is much higher than that of the time (see Fig. 9-36).

[7th special suggestion production]
In the seventh embodiment, when the display result of the 100th variation display after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is "off", when the gold active change effect is executed, the gaming machine is displayed. As a special suggestion effect that suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, the seventh special suggestion effect described later can be executed. This seventh special suggestion effect is an effect in which the final display result is "off" after the gold active change effect is executed.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot expectation is high at the timing when the gold active change effect is executed, and the player executes the RAM clear process at the timing when the display result does not become "big hit". It is recognizable that it is likely not.

In other words, the player who was expecting a big hit by executing the gold active change effect with a high expectation of a big hit feels disappointed that the final display result is "missing", but the gold active Since the final display result is "missing" after the change effect is executed, it is suggested that the RAM clear processing is not executed, so that the player's disappointment can be reduced and the game can be continued. Can be urged.

[7th special suggestion production example]
An example of the effect when the seventh special suggestion effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-35. FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects. 9-35 (3A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the seventh special suggestion effect is not executed, and FIG. 9-35 (3B) is an explanatory diagram when the seventh special suggestion effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a production image.

In this example, it is the 100th fluctuation display after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on, and FIG. 9-35 (3A) shows the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot". It is assumed that the gold active change effect is being executed. Further, in FIG. 9-35 (3B), it is assumed that the gold active change effect is executed when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of “out of super reach A”.

As shown in FIG. 9-35 (1), the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach A effect (battle effect) at the timing to be developed into the super reach in the fluctuation pattern, and the ally character 07TM390A is displayed on the image display device 5. , The enemy character 07TM390B, and the characters "VS" are displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the gold active change effect, and the active display area 07TM013 is displaying the active display 07TM003G in a golden mode corresponding to the currently executed variation display.

In addition, the effect configuration in various effect images (hold display, special display, first hold storage number, second hold storage number, background image, small symbol, etc.) shown in FIGS. 9-35 is in the above-described first embodiment. Since it is the same as the effect configuration of FIG. 9-11, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the ally character 07TM390A and the enemy character 07TM390B, and battles in the screen left area and the screen right area of the image display device 5. Display a battle effect image that suggests that the victory or defeat will be decided.

(Example of production when the 7th special suggestion production is not executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (3A), at the timing when the winning effect in the fluctuation pattern should be executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the winning effect and notifies that the display result is a “big hit”. .. In the victory effect, the character "victory" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 with the ally character 07TM390A that has won the enemy character 07TM390B displayed on the image display device 5, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "222") suggesting that the display result is a "big hit" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is continued.

(Example of production when the 7th special suggestion production is executed)
Next, as shown in FIG. 9-35 (3B), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect at the timing when the defeat effect in the fluctuation pattern should be executed, and notifies that the display result is “missing”. .. In the defeat effect, with the image display device 5 displaying the ally character 07TM390A defeated by the enemy character 07TM390B, the character "defeat" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. The combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "212") suggesting that the display result is "off" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is continued.

At this time, since the effect control CPU 120 is executing the defeat effect in the state where the gold active change effect is executed, it means that the seventh special suggestion effect is being executed.

<[For 100 fluctuations after turning on the power] Final display mode determination table for active display>
As shown in FIGS. 9-36, in the final display mode determination table of the [for 100th variation after power-on] active display, the display result specified by the display result specification command and the RAM clear specified by the initialization specification command. Judgment values for determining the final display mode of the active display are assigned according to whether or not the process is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 decides to set the final display mode of the active display as a normal mode at a rate of 80% when the display result is "off" and the RAM clear process is "not executed". It was decided that the final display mode of the active display would be the blue mode at a rate of 15%, and the final display mode of the active display would be the red mode at a rate of 4%. It is decided that the final display mode of the active display is the golden mode. That is, it is decided to execute the seventh special suggestion effect at a rate of 1%.

The effect control CPU 120 has a normal mode of the final display mode of active display at a rate of 80.5% when the display result is "off" and the RAM clear process is "executed" or not. It was decided that the final display mode of the active display would be the blue mode at a rate of 15%, and the final display mode of the active display would be the red mode at a rate of 4%, 0.5. It is decided that the final display mode of the active display is the golden mode at a rate of%. That is, it is decided to execute the seventh special suggestion effect at a rate of 0.5%.

When the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode at a rate of 55% regardless of whether or not the RAM clear process is executed, and 20%. The final display mode of the active display was decided to be the blue mode at the ratio of 15%, the final display mode of the active display was decided to be the red mode at the ratio of 15%, and the final display mode of the active display was decided at the ratio of 10%. It is decided that the aspect is a golden aspect.

[Other variants]
(1) In the above embodiment, the control is performed in the time saving state via the occurrence of a big hit or the arrival of the relief time saving, but the display result is "missing" not limited to such a form. At a certain time, a "time saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through a big hit game may be included.

For example, when the time-saving missed symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal state, the time-saving state C (1) the time-saving control is performed 100 times and (2) the low-accuracy control is performed 100 times (in this example, the time-saving state C). It is controlled by the chance time of 100 times of shortening time).

In the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), even if the time-reduced missed symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state transition control is not performed (the time reduction state is not controlled to 100 times of time reduction). This is because it does not reduce the degree of relief of the player. For example, if the player is configured to re-control to the time-saving state of 100 times of time-saving based on the stop display of the missed symbol with time-saving when it is controlled to the probability-changing state that tends to be a big hit, the player. It is not preferable because it controls from a state that is favorable to the user to a state that is disadvantageous to the user. Therefore, it is configured to control the time saving state to the time saving state of 100 times of the time saving only when the gaming state controlled when the out-of-time saving symbol is stopped and displayed is the normal state.

(2) In the above embodiment, the special display change effect is terminated at the timing when the variable display in which the special display change effect is executed is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form and the special display change effect is terminated. The special display change effect may not be ended at the timing when the variation display in which the effect is executed ends.

For example, the end timing of the special display change effect may be the timing after the variation display is executed a plurality of times after the special display change effect is executed. Further, the end timing of the special display change effect may be set when the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction is executed or when the variable display that becomes a big hit is executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, in (A) the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, or (B) the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit, the second special suggestion effect can be executed when the stage is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the execution of the second special suggestion effect may be restricted under specific conditions.

For example, in the variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less, the execution of the second special suggestion effect may be restricted when the countdown effect is being executed.

(4) In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display of ((A) 100 × N times (N is an integer of 1 or more) after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on is displayed at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed. An example in which the third special suggestion effect can be executed is shown when it is executed, or (B) when the 100 × Nth variation display is executed after being controlled to a low probability state after a big hit. At this time, the table for determining whether or not to execute the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode shall be a common table regardless of the number of fluctuations. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the table for determining whether or not the third special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode may be different depending on the number of fluctuations.

For example, (A) when the fluctuation display is executed 100 × N times (N is an integer of 1 to 6) after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) is controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. When the 100 × Nth variation display (N is an integer of 1 to 6) is executed, the first table (see FIGS. 9-28) is used as a table for determining whether or not the third special suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. ), The execution presence / absence of the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. Is executed, or when (D) the 100 × Mth variation display (M is an integer of 7 to 9) is executed after being controlled to a low probability state after a big hit, the third special suggestion effect is executed. The presence / absence of the third special suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on a second table different from the above-mentioned first table as a table for determining the presence / absence and the effect mode. At this time, in the second table, the execution ratio of the third special suggestion effect [green] and the third special suggestion effect [red] may be higher than the execution ratio of the third special suggestion effect [blue]. ..

Further, in the fluctuation display of the first cycle (100 × 1 = 100th time) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the third special suggestion effect [green] is obtained when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on. ] And the execution ratio of the third special suggestion effect [red] may be higher than the execution ratio of the third special suggestion effect [blue].

(5) In the above embodiment, in the fourth special suggestion effect, the effect stage shifts to the volcano stage for a predetermined period from the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on, and the fifth background image 07TM250 is used as the background image of the decorative pattern. Is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the fourth special suggestion effect may be started at a timing different from the first variation display after the power is turned on.

For example, the fourth special suggestion effect may be started at the timing when any of the first to tenth variation display after the power is turned on is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation that the RAM clear processing is not executed may be different depending on the start timing of the fourth special suggestion effect.

Further, as the fourth special suggestion effect, an effect of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. For example, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode at the start of fluctuation means that the decorative symbol scrolls smoothly from the top to the bottom, but the variation of the decorative symbol in a special mode at the start of fluctuation. The display may be a scroll display in which the decorative symbol is not smooth from upward to downward (scroll display after the decorative symbol moves so as to be caught in the symbol display area at the start of fluctuation).

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the fourth special suggestion effect is not executed when the RAM clear process is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the RAM clear process is executed. Even if there is, the fourth special suggestion effect may be executed.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio of determining the production mode of the fourth special suggestion effect is common regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Not limited to this, the ratio of determining the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened.

For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is 50 times or less, the fourth special suggestion effect may be executed up to the fluctuation display reaching the relief time reduction.

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which a plurality of types of production modes having different execution periods are provided as the production mode of the fourth special suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, but the effect of the fourth special suggestion effect is achieved. As an embodiment, a plurality of types of production stages may be provided.

For example, as the production mode of the fourth special suggestion effect, the effect stage shifts to the volcano stage (the background image of the decorative pattern is the fifth background image), and the effect stage is the space stage (the background image of the decorative pattern includes the universe). A mode for shifting to the sixth background image) may be provided. At this time, the fourth special suggestion effect in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage has a higher expectation that the RAM clear process is not executed than the fourth special suggestion effect in which the effect stage shifts to the volcano stage. You may. Further, the fourth special suggestion effect in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage may be an effect in which it is confirmed that the RAM clear process has not been executed.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect may be different depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. For example, the fourth special suggestion effect in which the production stage shifts to the volcanic stage when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is small than when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is large. May be executed at a high rate, or the fourth special suggestion effect in the mode in which the effect stage shifts to the space stage may be executed at a high rate.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example in which the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed is shown regardless of which display result is the display result, but the display result is not limited to such a form. The execution rate of the fifth special suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is the display result of.

For example, when the display result is "big hit", the execution rate of the fifth special suggestion effect may be set to 0%. That is, the execution of the fifth special suggestion effect may be restricted, and the normal dialogue advance notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation may be preferentially executed.

(10) In the above embodiment, when the normal dialogue notice effect is executed, the character D and the normal dialogue are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (characters "chance ??", "super heat !!". An example is shown in which the characters "FEVER !!") are displayed to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. Ordinary dialogue notice production may be executed.

For example, in the normal dialogue notice effect [chance] and the normal dialogue advance notice effect [super heat], the character D and the normal line are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (characters "chance ??", "super heat !!" Character) is displayed. On the other hand, in the normal dialogue advance notice effect [FEVER], the character D and the normal dialogue display (characters "FEVER !!") are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice corresponding to (the voice of "FEVER !!") may be played back and output.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example in which the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed after the big hit is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the execution of the fifth special suggestion effect may be restricted after the big hit.

For example, if it is decided to execute the 5th special suggestion effect in the 100th variation display after the big hit, even if the normal dialogue notice effect with a low expectation of the big hit is executed instead of the 5th special suggestion effect. good.

(12) In the above embodiment, in the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, an example in which the character D and the dialogue display are displayed at a common timing is shown, but the character is not limited to such an embodiment. The timing at which D is displayed and the timing at which the dialogue display is displayed may be different.

For example, in the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, the dialogue display may be displayed after the character D is displayed. In the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, the common character D is displayed first, and then the dialogue display with a different suggestion target is displayed later, so that attention is paid to which dialogue display is displayed. Can be done.

(13) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the decorative pattern (font of the number pattern, etc.) is common regardless of which production stage the production stage is. However, the display mode of the decorative pattern may be different depending on which production stage the production stage is.

For example, when controlled by the sunny stage, the display mode of the decorative symbol is the first mode (the font of the number symbol is Gothic), and when controlled by the cloudy stage, the display mode of the decorative symbol is. May be the second aspect (the font of the number pattern is Mincho style).

In this way, even if the display mode of the decorative symbol is different depending on which production stage the production stage is, "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol in the sixth special suggestion production. By doing so, it is suggested that the RAM clear processing is not executed.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the sixth special suggestion effect is not executed in the situation where the sixth special suggestion effect can be executed, any of the decorative symbols other than "7" is stopped in the middle symbol. An example of displaying is shown, but not limited to such a form, when the sixth special suggestion effect is not executed in a situation where the sixth special suggestion effect can be executed, a specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. May be good.

For example, in a situation where the sixth special suggestion effect can be executed, when the sixth special suggestion effect is not executed, a decorative symbol ("6" or "8") close to "7" may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. ..

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the seventh special suggestion effect suggesting that the RAM clear process is not executed is executed has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the RAM clear process is executed. You may execute the eighth special suggestion effect which confirms that it has not been done.

For example, the 7th special suggestion effect is the gold active change effect in the variable display where the final display result is "off", but it is better than the gold active change effect in the variable display where the final display result is "off". A high expectation effect (gold cut-in effect, etc.) with a high expectation of a big hit may be used as the eighth special suggestion effect. Further, the high-expectation effect (gold cut-in effect, etc.) in the variable display after the big hit may be an effect that confirms that the big hit will be achieved.

(16) In the above embodiment, the execution ratios of the red active change effect and the gold active change effect are the same regardless of the number of fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the red active change effect and the gold active change effect are not limited to such an embodiment. The execution rate may be different depending on the number of fluctuations.

For example, the variation display up to the 100th time after the power is turned on may be set to have a higher ratio of the gold active change effect being executed than the variation display after the 101st time after the power is turned on.

(17) In the above embodiment, the special suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the RAM clear process is being executed. However, the special suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the special suggestion effect is RAM clear. It may be an effect that confirms that the process is being executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened.

For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is less than 700, the special suggestion effect can be executed, while the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the relief time reduction is 701 times or more. May limit the execution of special suggestion effects.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example in which the special suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display after the big hit is shown, but the execution of the special suggestion effect is performed not only in such a form but also in the variable display after the big hit. You may limit it.

For example, when a configuration that restricts the execution of the special suggestion effect is adopted in the variable display after the big hit, the characters (character A, character B, character C) used in the special suggestion effect are displayed in the variable display after the big hit. If this is the case, it may be a high setting effect in which the high setting value is fixed in a gaming machine capable of setting set values related to the winning probability of the big hit, the payout rate, etc., or a big hit confirmation effect in which the big hit is confirmed.

(20) In the above embodiment, when [restricting the execution of the effect] is described, an example of [not executing the effect] is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. When it is described as [Restrict the execution of the effect], [Prohibit the execution of the effect], [Reduce the execution rate of the effect], [Execute some of the multiple effects]. (Execute only a predetermined type of effect among multiple types of effects, execute only a predetermined type of effect among multiple types of effects)], [Do not execute an effect, and execute another effect instead] It may include that.

(21) In the above embodiment, a look-ahead notice effect that suggests (notices) the expectation of a big hit in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution may be executed, and the pre-reading notice effect is a big hit. You may execute a big hit confirmation effect that confirms that it will be. When the jackpot confirmation effect is being executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted.

For example, when the jackpot confirmation effect (rainbow hold change effect that changes the hold display to rainbow color) is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted.

In the above embodiment, two types of display results, "missing" and "big hit", are provided as display results, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and other display results may be provided.

For example, as a display result, a "small hit" may be provided in addition to the "missing" and "big hit". The small hit winning probability may be higher than the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be lower than the big hit winning probability, and the small hit winning probability may be the same as the big hit winning probability. When the display result of the variable display becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state (special game state). In the small hit game state, the large winning opening is controlled to be open a smaller number of times or for a shorter period than in the big hit game state (advantageous state). For example, the small hit game state is two rounds, and the opening time of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is 1.0 second.

When this small hit occurs, a special suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as an effect during a small hit game, a small hit image in which information on the effect of the game machine (effect images related to the four high-expectation effects mounted on the game machine) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Shall be displayed. When this small hit image is displayed, a special suggestion effect is executed, and characters (character A, character B, character C) suggesting that RAM clear processing is not executed are superimposed and displayed on the small hit image. You may.

(22) In the above embodiment, the external output terminal that outputs data such as game information (big hit information (information indicating the number of times big hits have occurred), etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside is It is assumed that it is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, it is assumed that the "outer end A" and the "outer end B" are provided as external output terminals for outputting the data of the big hit information (information indicating the number of times the big hit has occurred). Further, it is assumed that an "outer end B" is provided as an external output terminal for outputting data of small hit information (information indicating the number of times small hits have occurred) when a small hit occurs. That is, when controlled to the big hit gaming state, signals are output from the "outer end A" and "outer end B", whereas when controlled to the small hit gaming state, the signal is output from the "outer end A". No signal is output, and the signal is output only from the "outer end B".

Further, every time the variable display is executed in the gaming machine, a symbol confirmation stop signal is output from the "outer end C" which is an external output terminal of the gaming machine. Here, it is assumed that at least the outer ends B and C are connected to a gaming device installed corresponding to the gaming machine (for example, a data display device installed above the gaming machine). In this gaming device, the variable display count (so-called variable number) displayed is incremented by 1 based on the input of the "outer end C" signal each time the variable display is executed. .. Then, when the signal of the "outer end B" is input, the variable display number (variation number) is reset to 0, and the big hit number (hit number) is incremented by 1.

In this way, by outputting the big hit information data and the small hit information data in common from the outer end B, the number of big hits displayed on the data counter or the like installed outside the gaming machine is the number of small hits. Can include the number of occurrences of. Therefore, even when a small hit occurs, the number of fluctuations displayed on the data counter is initialized and counted from "0". That is, it is possible to prevent the player from accurately recognizing the number of fluctuations after the big hit.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the recovery time reduction number designation command, which is an effect control command for designating the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on, specifies the value of the relief time reduction counter. However, when the value of the relief time reduction counter reaches the specified value, the special suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 that could not receive the effect recovery time reduction number designation command, which is an effect control command for specifying the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on, may limit the execution of the special suggestion effect.

For example, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot receive the recovery time reduction number of times designation command when the power is turned on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect may be skipped, or the effect mode of the special suggestion effect may be skipped. Of these, it is possible to determine the effect mode that suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed, but it may not be determined to the effect mode that determines that the RAM clear process is not executed.

(24) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the recovery time reduction time reduction command, which is an effect control command that specifies the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on, specifies the value of the relief time reduction counter. However, when the value of the relief time reduction counter reaches a specified value, a countdown effect or a relief time reduction arrival effect is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120, which could not receive the effect control command for specifying the value of the relief time reduction counter when the power is turned on, limits the execution of the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect. You may.

For example, if the effect control CPU 120 cannot receive the recovery time reduction number of times designation command when the power is turned on, the process of determining whether to execute the countdown effect or the relief time reduction arrival effect may be skipped.

(25) In the above embodiment, in the effect determination process at the start of variation, when the specific suggestion effect limit flag is set, is the variation displayed once after the power is turned on? (The value of the relief time reduction counter is An example of determining "whether or not it is" 899 ") is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the specific suggestion effect restriction flag is set in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the variation display is executed more than a predetermined number of times.

For example, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation display is executed five times or more after the power is turned on. Then, if the fluctuation display is not executed five times or more after the power is turned on, the special suggestion effect restriction flag may be set. Further, in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation display is executed 10 times or more after the power is turned on. Then, if the fluctuation display is not executed 10 times or more after the power is turned on, the special suggestion effect restriction flag may be set.

(26) In the above embodiment, an example in which the effect mode of the countdown effect is common regardless of whether or not the RAM clear process is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form and depends on whether or not the RAM clear process is executed. Therefore, the production mode of the countdown effect may be different.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not executed, the countdown display in the countdown effect may be displayed in red, and if the RAM clear process is executed, the countdown display in the countdown effect may be displayed in white. ..

(27) In the above embodiment, an example in which the types of characters including the effect image are different is shown as the production mode of the first special suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, but as the production mode of the first special suggestion effect. It may be different except for the type of character.

For example, in the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect and the B aspect, the character (small) → the character (large) is displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, in the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect, the character (small) → the character (extra large) is displayed on the image display device 5. What is this character (extra large)? A character that is displayed larger than the character (large) and is displayed with a special effect image.

Further, in the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect, a special sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the main lamp 9a may be made to emit a special color, and a movable body provided in the gaming machine ( You may move the accessory).

(28) In the above embodiment, an example in which the types of characters including the effect image are different is shown as an effect mode of the special display change effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the character is used as an effect mode of the special display change effect. It may be different except for the type.

For example, in the special display change effect of the A mode, the special display at the lower right of the image display device 5 is changed to the special display of the A mode in which the effect image and the character A are displayed (the same applies to the B mode). On the other hand, in the special display change effect of the C mode, the character C accompanied by the effect image is changed to the special display of the C mode in such a manner that the character C with the effect image flies from the center of the screen with respect to the special display at the lower right of the image display device 5. May be good. That is, the special display change effect of the C aspect may be executed in the emphasized aspect rather than the special display change effect of the A aspect.

(29) In the above embodiment, in the special display change effect of the C mode, the special display (characters of "game XXX times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is the special display of the C mode ("until the play time". An example of changing to (characters of "YYY times") is shown, but not limited to such a form, in the special display change effect of the C mode, the special display ("Game XXX times") at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is shown. The character) may be changed to the special display of the C mode (character of "YYY times until play time").

For example, in the special display change effect of the C aspect, the red effect image is displayed around the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character C is displayed behind the special display.

(30) In the above embodiment, an example in which different effect images are used for the countdown display in the countdown effect and the special display in the special display change effect of the C aspect is shown, but the countdown effect is not limited to such a form. You may use the effect image common to the countdown display in the above and the special display in the special display change effect of the C aspect.

For example, the countdown display may be displayed in the countdown effect, and the effect image common to the countdown display may be displayed as the special display in the special display change effect of the C aspect. Further, the special display may be displayed in the special display change effect of the C aspect, and the effect image common to the special display may be displayed as the countdown display in the countdown effect.

(31) In the above embodiment, when the special display change effect of the C mode is executed and the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, the period until the relief time is shortened or a big hit occurs. It is assumed that the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the special display change effect of the C aspect is executed and the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, any timing before reaching the relief time reduction or The special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed to the special display at any timing before the big hit occurs.

For example, after the special display change effect of mode C is executed and the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, the countdown effect is started based on the value of the relief time reduction counter being 10. Then, the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed to the special display. Then, the image display device 5 is displayed on a special display at the lower right of the screen for a period until the relief time is reached.

It should be noted that after the special display change effect of the C aspect is executed and the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, either the timing before reaching the relief time reduction or before the big hit occurs. At the timing of, the special display at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 may be erased.

(32) In the above embodiment, an example in which seven types of fluctuation patterns are provided as fluctuation patterns has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a variation pattern, and other fluctuation patterns may be provided.

For example, among the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach out of reach", the fluctuation pattern of "shortening out of reach" with an extremely short fluctuation period may be provided. It is assumed that the fluctuation period of the "non-reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, while the fluctuation period of the "shortening out of reach" fluctuation pattern is 3 seconds.

The case where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" is a case where the first reserved storage number is a predetermined number or more. For example, when the number of first reserved storages is 3 or more, it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" as the fluctuation pattern.

(33) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), the execution period of the first special suggestion effect is shorter than 4 seconds. For example, the execution period of the first special suggestion effect may be 2 seconds. At this time, even if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" (3 seconds), if the start timing of the first special suggestion effect is the timing at the start of the fluctuation, the first special suggestion effect ( 2 seconds) can be executed.

Further, for example, the execution period of the first special suggestion effect may be 3.5 seconds. At this time, the execution period (3.5 seconds) of the first special suggestion effect is longer than the fluctuation period (3 seconds) when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation", and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". It is shorter than the fluctuation period (10 seconds) when the fluctuation pattern is "off". If it is decided to execute the first special suggestion effect when the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "shortening variation deviation", the first special suggestion effect can be executed over a plurality of variation displays. The execution period can be secured.

(34) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special suggestion effect is executed only once during the period from when the power is turned on or after the big hit to when the relief time is reached, but the power supply is not limited to such a mode. The special suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times during the period from the time of throwing in or after the big hit to the time when the relief time is shortened.

For example, when the first special suggestion effect of mode C is executed as the second and subsequent first special suggestion effects when the first special suggestion effect is executed two or more times after the power is turned on, the red effect image is more than the red effect image. Character C with an enhanced golden effect image may be displayed.

In addition, when the special suggestion effect is executed multiple times during the period from when the power is turned on or after the big hit until the relief time is reached, the RAM clear process is performed more than the effect mode of the special suggestion effect executed immediately before. The execution of the special suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not executed and has a low expectation may be restricted.

(35) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special display is always displayed during the period during which the relief time reduction counter is updated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the relief time reduction counter is updated. The special display may be hidden even during the period of time.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach, the special display is displayed until it develops into super reach, but when the super reach effect (battle effect, challenge effect) is executed. , The special display may be hidden.

(36) In the above embodiment, when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, the special display 07TM150AD of the A mode and the reaching mode (in this example, "Game MAX"). An example is shown in which a white effect image is displayed around the special display including characters, and character A is displayed behind the special display), but the relief time is shortened, not limited to such a form. When the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches, the execution of the special display change effect may be restricted.

For example, when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, the special display change effect is executed, the special display of the A mode is displayed, and then the middle stage effect in the relief time reduction effect is performed. At the timing of execution, the special display change effect may be terminated and the special display of the arrival mode may be displayed.

(37) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (3A), the variation display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and the display result is "missing" in all the variation displays. In this case, an example is shown in which the special display is not displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. When the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) and the display result is "off" in all the variable displays, after the game state is controlled to the normal state, it is specially displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. The display may be displayed.

For example, when the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B and the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays, the image display device 5 is controlled after the game state is controlled to the normal state. When the special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen, the special display may be displayed in a manner of notifying the player that the value of the relief time reduction counter has not been updated. At this time, the special display may include characters such as "game --- times".

(38) In the above embodiment, the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and when the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. An example in which a special suggestion effect can be executed is shown, but not limited to such a form, the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B, and the display result is "" in all the variable displays. In the case of "off", the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted after the gaming state is controlled to the normal state.

For example, when the variable display is executed a specified number of times (1000 times) in the time saving state B and the display result is "missing" in all the variable displays, the game state is set when the game state is controlled to the normal state. A flag may be provided. When this flag is set, the process of determining whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect may be skipped.

(39) In the above embodiment, an example of determining whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed is shown according to whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed and the value of the relief time reduction counter, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. , Whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect may be determined based on other factors.

For example, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an out discharge switch that detects that a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings at the bottom of the gaming area has passed through an out opening that is taken in. .. Whether or not to execute the special suggestion effect may be determined according to the number of outs, which is the number of game balls that have passed through the out port detected by this out discharge switch. When the number of outs is large, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher than when the number of outs is small.

(40) In the above embodiment, there is an example in which it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect of the C mode in which it is determined that the RAM clearing process has not been executed and the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified. As shown, not limited to such a form, a special suggestion effect of a mode (X mode) in which it is determined that the RAM clear process is not executed, and a mode in which the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified. The special suggestion effect of (Y aspect) and the special suggestion effect of different effect modes may be executed.

For example, in the variable display after the special suggestion effect of the X mode is executed, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect of the Y mode may be high. Further, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect of the X mode may be higher when the number of executions of the special suggestion effect is large than when the number of executions of the special suggestion effect is small. Further, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect of the Y mode may be higher when the number of executions of the special suggestion effect is large than when the number of executions of the special suggestion effect is small. Further, in the variable display after the special suggestion effect of the X aspect is executed, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be low, or the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be high. Further, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect of the X aspect may be increased in the variable display after the special suggestion effect of the X aspect is executed. Further, in the variable display after the special suggestion effect of the X mode is executed, the execution of the special suggestion effect of the mode (A mode) in which the RAM clear process is not executed and the expectation is low may be restricted (execution ratio). May be lower).

(41) In the above embodiment, (A) in the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the power is turned on, or (B) in the 100th variation display after being controlled to the low accuracy state after the big hit. , An example is shown in which the process of determining whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed is executed, and the special suggestion effect can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the presence or absence of the special suggestion effect is determined at a predetermined timing. A configuration may be adopted in which processing can be executed and a special suggestion effect can be executed.

For example, in the second special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the stage is changed (that is, in the variable display immediately before the effect stage shifts), a process of determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestion effect is executed. A configuration capable of executing the second special suggestion effect may be adopted. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not to execute the second special suggestion effect is executed every 25 fluctuations, and the second special suggestion effect can be executed.

For example, in the 5th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the fluctuation patterns are "out of normal reach", "out of super reach A", and "out of super reach B", it is determined whether or not to execute the 5th special suggestion effect. A configuration in which the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed may be adopted. Therefore, the display result becomes "off", and the process of determining whether or not to execute the fifth special suggestion effect is executed for each fluctuation pattern in which the reach state is established, and the fifth special suggestion effect can be executed.

For example, in the 6th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the process of determining whether or not to execute the 6th special suggestion effect can be executed, and the 6th special suggestion effect can be executed. May be adopted. Therefore, every time the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the process of determining whether or not to execute the sixth special suggestion effect is executed, and the sixth special suggestion effect can be executed.

For example, in the 7th special suggestion effect among the special suggestion effects, the display result is "off", and when the high expectation effect (gold active change effect) is executed, it is determined whether or not the 7th special suggestion effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the process can be executed and the seventh special suggestion effect can be executed. Therefore, the display result is "off", and the process of determining whether or not to execute the 7th special suggestion effect is executed for each variable display for which the high expectation effect (gold active change effect, etc.) is executed, and the 7th special suggestion is executed. The production can be executed.

(42) Of the special suggestion effects (1st special suggestion effect to 8th special suggestion effect) shown in the above embodiment, only one type of special suggestion effect may be executed. The above special suggestion effects may be combined and executed. This combination can be set arbitrarily.
Further, when the above two or more types of special suggestion effects are provided, the number of fluctuations executed may be different for each type of special suggestion effects. In that case, for example, the 3rd special suggestion effect, the 4th special suggestion effect, the 6th special suggestion effect, the 7th special suggestion effect, etc. Regarding the special suggestion effect that is executed in a mode that does not notify the existence, the first special suggestion effect, the second special suggestion effect, and the like are performed with a relatively small number of fluctuations such as the 30th and 50th fluctuations. Regarding the special suggestion effect that is executed in a mode that is relatively easy for the player to recognize, such as the fifth special suggestion effect (a mode that actively notifies that the player is deferred by a line or a special character), the 100th variation, etc. It may be executed with a relatively large number of fluctuations. Alternatively, among the special suggestion effects, the type of special suggestion effect that notifies that the deferment is confirmed may be executed with a relatively large number of fluctuations such as the 100th variation. According to this, since a certain number of fluctuations is required until the player is convinced that the player is deferred, the operation can be promoted, and the player who has a deep knowledge of the game machine can play advantageously. , It is possible to promote continuous operation for a long period of time.
Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the first special suggestion effect to the third special suggestion effect and the fifth special suggestion effect to the seventh special suggestion effect are executed at the 100th variation after the power is turned on. It is not executed at a predetermined number of fluctuations such as eyes, but may be executed at a predetermined ratio with any number of fluctuations other than the 100th variation (any number of fluctuations). When the number of fluctuations other than the 100th fluctuation can be executed, for example, the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted for a certain period (for example, between 20 fluctuations) from the power-on. According to this, even if there is a player who moves to another gaming machine only by confirming whether it is deferred or not, it is possible to secure the operation for a certain period from the power-on, so that the store side is excessively disadvantaged. You can prevent it from being worn. On the contrary, the special suggestion effect may be executed only for a certain period (for example, between 100 fluctuations) after the power is turned on. According to this, it becomes possible for the player who confirms whether or not it is deferred to secure the operation for a certain period from the power-on, and by playing for a certain period, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is reduced. , The player who plays next can expect to reach the relief time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.
Further, when the number of fluctuations other than the 100th variation can be executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize, for example, the third special suggestion effect, the fourth special suggestion effect, the sixth special suggestion effect, and the seventh special suggestion effect. Regarding the special suggestion effect that is executed in the mode (a mode that does not actively notify that it is deferred by a line or a special character), it should be executed at a relatively high rate, and the first special suggestion effect or the second Regarding the special suggestion effect that is executed in a mode that is relatively easy for the player to recognize, such as the special suggestion effect and the fifth special suggestion effect (a mode that actively notifies that the player is deferred by a line or a special character), the first It may be executed at a lower ratio than the 3 special suggestion effect, the 4th special suggestion effect, the 6th special suggestion effect, and the 7th special suggestion effect. Or, of the special suggestion effects, the type of special suggestion effect that notifies that the deferment is confirmed is lower than the third special suggestion effect, the fourth special suggestion effect, the sixth special suggestion effect, and the seventh special suggestion effect. It may be executed.

(43) In the above embodiment, an example in which the special display is not displayed when the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state different from the normal state is shown, but the gaming state is controlled to a gaming state different from the normal state. The special display may be displayed when it is displayed.

For example, when the gaming state is controlled to the reduced working hours state, a special display may be displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the special display may display character information (characters such as "100 games") corresponding to the number of fluctuations executed after being controlled to a low accuracy state after the power is turned on or after a big hit. Character information suggesting the currently controlled gaming state (characters "during chance time", characters "during play time", etc.) may be displayed. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state, a special display may be displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the special display may display character information (characters such as "probability changing") suggesting the currently controlled gaming state.

(43) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state, an example in which the fluctuation pattern can be determined as the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" is shown, but the variation pattern is not limited to such a mode. , Even when the gaming state is controlled to any gaming state, the fluctuation pattern may be determined to be a fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation".

For example, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "shortening fluctuation deviation" when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B is that the fluctuation pattern is "" when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state A. It may be higher than the rate determined as "out of shortening fluctuation". Further, among the fluctuation patterns in which the display result is "off" when the gaming state is controlled to the reduced working hours state B, the fluctuation patterns accompanied by reach ("normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", "super reach B". The ratio determined as "missing" etc.) is the ratio determined as the fluctuation pattern with reach among the fluctuation patterns in which the display result is "missing" when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the reduced working hours state A. May be lower than. In the following description, a fluctuation display in which the display result is "missing" may be described as "missing fluctuation", and a fluctuation display in which the display result is "big hit" may be described as "big hit fluctuation".

In a game with a short relief time that is controlled after executing a certain number of fluctuation displays from the previous jackpot, tentatively, among the missed fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is not the shortest (“non-reach loss” different from “shortened fluctuation loss”) ”, Etc.) are frequently executed, and if fluctuations of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times (variation patterns with reach, etc.) are frequently executed, the fluctuation efficiency is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. Will be invited. By adopting the configuration of this modification, in the game with a short relief time, the fluctuation pattern (“shortened fluctuation deviation”) with the shortest fluctuation time among the deviation fluctuations is frequently executed, and the fluctuation time is also executed. By lowering the execution rate of fluctuations of long fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns with reach, etc.), the fluctuation efficiency can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, as a fluctuation pattern for "off" without reach in the time saving state B, a fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation" in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" may be provided. A fluctuation pattern of "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation" may be provided, which has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation".

For example, in the [for loss] fluctuation pattern judgment table of [for time saving state B], 1 to 600 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation". Therefore, 601 to 990 may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation", and 991 to 997 may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "reach deviation".

For example, as fluctuation patterns for "off" without reach in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, "ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation" and "shortening fluctuation deviation" are provided, while "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation". "" May not be provided, and "ultra-super-shortening fluctuation deviation" and "shortening fluctuation deviation" may be provided, and "extreme ultra-shortening fluctuation deviation" may also be provided.

For example, in the [for loss] fluctuation pattern judgment table of [for time saving state A], 1 to 100 of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortening fluctuation loss". , 101 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation", 201 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the "reach deviation". It may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of. Then, in the [for loss] variation pattern determination table of [for time saving state C], 1 to 600 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of "ultra-shortening variation loss". , 601 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation", 901 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "reach deviation". It may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of.

In the above example, the relationship of time-saving state B> time-saving state C and time-saving state B> time-saving state A with respect to the ratio at which "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation" is selected from the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach loss". It has become. Not limited to such a form, the relationship of time saving state C> time saving state B may be satisfied with respect to the ratio in which "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation" is selected from the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach loss", and the time saving state A may be used. > The relationship may be the time saving state B.

In the example shown above, an example is shown in which the time saving state B <time saving state C and the time saving state B <time saving state A are related with respect to the ratio at which the variation pattern of "out of reach" is selected. The relationship may be such that the time saving state C <time saving state B or the time saving state A <time saving state B with respect to the ratio at which the variation pattern of "out of reach" is selected.

Further, for example, as the [for loss] fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state B, different fluctuation pattern determination tables may be provided according to the number of fluctuations in the time saving state B.

For example, from the control to the time saving state B until the 1st to 300th variation display in which the display result becomes "missing" is executed, in the variation pattern determination table, among the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. 1 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-shortened fluctuation deviation", 801 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach deviation". It may be assigned to a variation pattern. Further, from the control to the time saving state B until the 301st to 1000th variation display in which the display result becomes "missing" is executed, in the variation pattern determination table, among the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. 1 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "extremely shortened fluctuation deviation", 901 to 950 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach deviation". It may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern of.

(44) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state is the time saving state B, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of the number of fluctuations. However, when the gaming state is the time saving state B, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the number of fluctuations.

For example, among the out-of-bounds fluctuations, a fluctuation pattern of "long out-of-long fluctuation" with a relatively long fluctuation period may be provided. For example, the fluctuation period of the "non-reach out of reach" fluctuation pattern is 10 seconds, while the fluctuation period of the "long out of reach" fluctuation pattern is 20 seconds. In the case of the first variation display in which the gaming state is controlled to the reduced working hours state B, the variation pattern of "long variation deviation" may be determined at a rate of 100% with respect to the deviation variation. Then, in the case of the second and subsequent fluctuation displays in which the gaming state is controlled to the reduced working hours state B, the fluctuation pattern of "shortening fluctuation deviation" is determined at a rate of 95% for the deviation variation, and "super" is determined at a rate of 5%. The fluctuation pattern of "out of reach" may be determined.

According to such a configuration, it is based on the reserved storage corresponding to the first special symbol before the reserved storage corresponding to the second special symbol is generated (before the number of the second reserved storage is increased) in the variable display of the relief time reduction. It is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed and to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged.

(45) In the above embodiment, in the variation display when the display result is "off", 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period based on the reception of the symbol confirmation A designation command at the end of the variation. It shall be. However, in the variation display in which the relief time is reached even when the display result is "missing", 20 seconds may be set as the symbol confirmation period based on the reception of the symbol confirmation C designation command at the end of the variation.

For example, in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, when a symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds is set, an effect of notifying the shift to the relief time reduction or an effect of notifying that the player is right-handed during this symbol confirmation period. May be executed.

(46) In the above embodiment, the period until the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B and the first variation display (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed (that is, the number of reserved memories is 0). During a certain period of time), the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 is always displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 is displayed in the center part of the screen of the image display device 5. Not limited to such a form, in the period until the first variation display (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed under the control of the time saving state B (that is, the period in which the number of reserved storage is 0). , While the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 is always displayed, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may not be displayed. Then, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may be displayed in response to the execution of the first variation display of the second special symbol. That is, the right-handed promotion image 07TM370 may be displayed at least at all times at the timing when the relief time is shortened.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 is erased when the first variation display of the second special symbol is executed, but after that, the second special symbol is deleted. 2 When the number of second reserved storages becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, when it becomes 0) due to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the special symbol, the special right-handed promotion image 07TM380 may be displayed again. ..

(47) In the above embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (handle operation, push button operation, stick controller operation, detection of game ball launch, etc.) on the gaming machine. In this case, the CPU 103 shall transmit a customer waiting demo display designation command for designating the customer waiting state to the effect control CPU 120. Then, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo display designation command, it is assumed that the customer waiting demo effect in which the demo image 07TM500 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. In addition, the customer waiting demonstration effect shall end when the operation for the game machine (handle operation, push button operation, stick controller operation, detection of game ball launch, detection of game ball winning, etc.) is performed. , It may not end depending on the passage of time.

The demo image in this case is an image having a higher display priority than the always right-handed promotion image and the special right-handed promotion image (the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in the foreground). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to always visually recognize the right-handed promotion image and the special right-handed promotion image when the demo image is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who simply passes in front of the gaming machine to detect that the gaming machine is controlled to the reduced working hours state B.

(48) In the above embodiment, the variation display is started after the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted (updated) by 1 in step S07TM71 of the special symbol normal processing. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the execution of the fluctuation display, and then the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is restarted (without executing the RAM clear processing), the remedy time reduction counter after the update is taken over. There is. Here, if it is decided to execute a special suggestion effect before the power is turned off for the fluctuation display that was executed when the power was turned off, the fluctuation display that was restarted after the power was turned on is special. The suggestion effect may be executed (the decision to execute the special suggestion effect before the power is turned off after the power is turned on may be taken over), or the special suggestion effect may not be executed in the variable display restarted after the power is turned on. Good (You may cancel the execution decision of the special suggestion effect before the power is turned off after the power is turned on).

(49) In the above embodiment, the character type (character A, character B, character C) used in the first special suggestion effect is used in the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit (super reach effect, etc.). An example different from the character type (friendly character, enemy character) was explained. Not limited to such a form, the type of character used in the first special suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C) and the character used in the effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit (super reach effect, etc.). At least a part of the characters (friendly character, enemy character) may be common.

(50) In the above embodiment, when the power is cut off while the countdown effect based on the remaining 10 fluctuations or less until the relief time is shortened is executed, and then the power is turned on and the fluctuation display is restarted. , The countdown effect may be continuously executed in the variation display after the restarted variation display, or the countdown effect may not be executed (cancelled).

Here, for example, if a power failure occurs while the fluctuation display in which the remaining countdown is n times is being executed, the remaining n times (n fluctuations) from the first fluctuation display restarted after the power is turned on. ) May be restarted, and the countdown effect is not restarted in the first fluctuation display restarted after the power is turned on, and the remaining n-1 times (remaining n-1 fluctuations) are displayed from the next fluctuation display. ) May be restarted. Further, after the power is turned on, the countdown effect may be restarted from the fluctuation display in which the remaining three times are reached until the relief time is shortened.

(51) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which two or more types of special suggestion effects may be combined and executed among the special suggestion effects (first special suggestion effect to eighth special suggestion effect). However, the execution of the special suggestion effect may be restricted according to a predetermined condition.

For example, for one special suggestion effect, the expectation that the RAM clear process is not executed is determined to be low, and for the other special suggestion effect, the expectation that the RAM clear process is not executed is determined. If the mode suggesting that the degree is high is determined, one of the special suggestion effects may not be executed (the former effect is restricted).

Further, for example, when it is decided to execute one special suggestion effect and the other special suggestion effect in a common variable display, both special suggestion effects can be executed in duplicate (display area). , When the execution timing is different, when different effect devices are used, etc.), both special suggestion effects may be executed. However, when it is difficult to execute both special suggestion effects in duplicate (when the display area is common, the execution timing is common, when a common effect device is used, etc.), either special effect is used. The execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted.

(52) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the special display change effect is not executed after the special display change effect is executed once, but the special display change effect is not limited to such a form. After being executed once, the special display change effect may be executed again.

For example, in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on, after the special display change effect of the A mode is executed as the first special display change effect, the special display change effect of the B mode or the C mode is performed as the second special display change effect. The display change effect may be executed. The execution timing of the second special display change effect may be a predetermined timing in the variation display in which the first special display change effect is executed, after the variation display in which the first special display change effect is executed. It may be a predetermined timing in the variable display of.

(53) In the above embodiment, the special display change effect shows an example in which a character accompanied by an effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the special display, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the special display change effect is not limited to this. May be an effect in which the character acts on the special display.

For example, the special display change effect may be an effect in which the character throws a ball with an effect image to the special display. At this time, the degree of expectation that the RAM clear processing is not executed may be suggested depending on the mode of the character throwing the ball and the mode of the effect image of the ball. Further, in such a special display change effect, an effect mode in which the character hits the special display after throwing the ball (change success mode) and an effect mode in which the character does not hit the special display after throwing the ball (change failure mode). ) And may be provided. At this time, depending on the mode of the character throwing the ball and the mode of the effect image of the ball, the degree of expectation that the RAM clear processing is not executed may be suggested, and the degree of expectation that is the mode of successful change may be suggested.

(54) In the above embodiment, if the display result is a variable display that is "off", the first special suggestion effect is performed when neither the special suggestion effect restriction flag nor the recovery time high base flag is set. An example that can be executed is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, but it is a variable display in which the display result is "off", and neither the special suggestion effect restriction flag nor the recovery high base flag is set. Even so, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted.

For example, if the display result is a variable display that is "off" and neither the special suggestion effect restriction flag nor the recovery high base flag is set, a high expectation effect (super reach effect with a high jackpot expectation, etc.) ), The execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted in the variation display, and the first special suggestion effect may be executed in the variation display after the variation display.

(55) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed is determined in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the special suggestion corresponds to the determination of the variation pattern. Whether or not to execute the effect may be determined. That is, by determining the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the special suggestion effect is executed.

For example, as a variation pattern in which the display result for the first special symbol is "off" and the special suggestion effect is not executed, "non-reach loss (no special suggestion effect)" and "normal reach loss (special suggestion)". "No effect)", "Super reach A off (no special suggestion effect)", and "Super reach B off (no special suggestion effect)" are provided on the normal table, and the display result for the first special symbol is As the fluctuation pattern that is "off" and the special suggestion effect is executed, "non-reach loss (with special suggestion effect)", "normal reach loss (with special suggestion effect)", and "super reach A". There is a special table with "off (with special suggestion effect)" and "super reach B off (with special suggestion effect)", and which table is selected according to the value of the relief time reduction counter. You may decide. Regarding the variable display of the first special symbol in which the special suggestion effect is not executed, one of the variable patterns without the special suggestion effect is determined, and the variable display of the first special symbol that enables the special suggestion effect to be executed (power on). With respect to the 100th variation display after the big hit and the 100th variation display after the big hit), one of the variation patterns with the special suggestion effect is determined. It should be noted that the special table may include a variation pattern without a special suggestion effect.

(56) In the above embodiment, the countdown effect and the relief time reduction arrival effect are determined whether or not they are executed according to the value of the relief time reduction counter, so that the executed variation display is the first special symbol and the second special. It is possible to execute a countdown effect and a relief time reduction effect regardless of the variable display corresponding to any of the symbols.

That is, regardless of whether the variation display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 to 10 is the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, the countdown effect or the relief time reduction is reached. The production can be executed.

For example, as a gaming machine in which the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4 and the upper limit of the second reserved storage number is 4 (the upper limit of the total reserved storage number is 8), the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, There is a gaming machine that executes a variable display based on the winning order to the second starting winning opening). In such a gaming machine with a variation in the winning order, in what order is the variation display of the first special symbol for four times and the variation display for the second special symbol for four times based on eight reserved memories executed? Is not constant, so the fluctuation display in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 to 10, or the fluctuation display of the 100th time after the power is turned on and the fluctuation display of the 100th time after the big hit is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. It is uncertain whether it is a variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, regarding the 100th variation display after the power is turned on and the 100th variation display after the big hit, a special suggestion effect is produced depending on whether the variation display is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The variation pattern may be determined based on a common special table provided with the accompanying variation pattern. In addition, a first special table for variable display of the first special symbol and a second special table for variable display of the second special symbol are separately provided, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Although a different type of variation pattern is determined by the variation display, a special suggestion effect may be executed correspondingly (according to the determined variation pattern) for any variation display.

Further, not only the gaming machine having such a variation in the winning order, but also the gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time, the 100th time after the power is turned on. Regarding the variation display and the 100th variation display after the big hit, there is a common variation pattern with a special suggestion effect between the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol. The variation pattern may be determined based on the special table of. In addition, a first special table for variable display of the first special symbol and a second special table for variable display of the second special symbol are separately provided, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Although a different type of variation pattern is determined by the variation display, a special suggestion effect may be executed correspondingly (according to the determined variation pattern) for any variation display.

(57) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state at the time of turning on the power is the high base state, the high base flag at the time of restoration is set, so that the 100th variation display after the power is turned on is executed. Regardless of whether the gaming state at that time is the normal state or the high base state, the execution of the first special suggestion effect shall be restricted. In addition, in the case of "when the fluctuation display is controlled to the high base state in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on", it is determined that the display result is "out of time reduction" in any of the 1st to 99th fluctuation displays after the power is turned on. It is also included that the time is controlled to the time saving state C. In the above embodiment, in the 100th fluctuation display after the big hit, the first special suggestion effect is performed regardless of the gaming state at the time of turning on the power (regardless of whether or not the high base flag at the time of restoration is set). It is feasible.

In addition, when the gaming state at the time of turning on the power is the normal state, the high base flag at the time of restoration is not set, so that the gaming state when the 100th fluctuation display is executed after the power is turned on is the normal state or the high state. The first special suggestion effect can be executed in any of the game states of the base state. In addition, in the case of "when the fluctuation display is controlled to the high base state in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on", it is determined that the display result is "out of time reduction" in any of the 1st to 99th fluctuation displays after the power is turned on. It is also included that the time is controlled to the time saving state C. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first special suggestion effect even when the time saving state C is controlled.

Not limited to such a form, the gaming state when the 100th variation display after the power is turned on or the 100th variation display after the big hit is executed is the high base state regardless of the gaming state when the power is turned on. In some cases, the execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted.

(Means 07-1)
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on, there are a plurality of production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the production mode of the first special suggestion effect. When the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed, the ratio that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" is high, and the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed. In, the ratio that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 300" is high, and when the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 300". The ratio of "199" is high. Therefore, the ratio of which effect mode the first special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened by the effect mode of the first special suggestion effect, so that the first special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of expectation, it is possible to play up to the variable display (in this example, the 100th variable display after the power is turned on) in which the first special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is small by the first special suggestion effect, the game is continued for the game after the first special suggestion effect is executed by the player. Can give motivation to do.

(Means 07-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), when the RAM clear processing is not executed in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 70 to 100%. On the other hand, when the RAM clear processing is executed, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Therefore, when the RAM clear process is not executed, the execution rate of the first special suggestion effect is higher than when the RAM clear process is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear process is executed and the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, depending on whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of expectation that it will be executed, it is possible to play up to the variable display (in this example, the 100th variable display after the power is turned on) in which the first special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the RAM clear processing has been executed by the first special suggestion effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the first special suggestion effect is executed. Can be given.

(Means 08-1)
As shown in FIGS. 9-24, when the production stage changes (changes), the eye-catching effect is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (2A) to (2C), the eye-catching effect is performed. When the effect is executed, the second special suggestion effect is executed as a special suggestion effect that suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, when the RAM clear processing is not executed in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, the second special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 70 to 100%. Then, when the RAM clear processing is executed, the second special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60%. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing is not executed, the execution rate of the second special suggestion effect is higher than when the RAM clear processing is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed depending on whether or not the second special suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, the stage is changed at the timing when the second special suggestion effect is executed. You can play with a sense of expectation. Further, if it can be predicted that the RAM clearing process has been executed by the second special suggestion effect, the player can be motivated to continue the game even after the stage change.

(Means 08-2)
As shown in FIG. 9-25, there are a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the effect mode of the second special suggestion effect, and when the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed. Has a high ratio of the value of the relief time reduction counter being "700 to 800", and when the second special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 300". When the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction counter is high. Therefore, the ratio of which effect mode the second special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened by the effect mode of the second special suggestion effect, so that the second special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of anticipation, you can play until the stage change, which is the timing when the second special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is small by the second special suggestion effect, the player can be motivated to continue the game even after the stage change. ..

(Means 07-3)
As shown in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in FIG. 9-9, the restoration time initialization flag is set when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 899 in the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on. When not, that is, when the power is turned off and turned on without executing the fluctuation display after the RAM clear processing is executed (YES in step S07TM1000 → YES in step S07TM1010), the RAM clear processing is not executed. Occasionally, the special suggestion effect restriction flag is set (step S07TM1020).

When this special effect restriction flag is set (YES in step S07TM1032), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect (step S07TM1038) is skipped. Therefore, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, the power is turned off and the power is turned on (the RAM clear process is not executed at this time) before the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on. In some cases, the execution of the first special suggestion effect can be restricted.

According to such a configuration, the RAM clear processing is executed in the present embodiment adopting the configuration in which the execution ratio of the first special suggestion effect is high when the RAM clear processing is not executed. Nevertheless, in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, the first special suggestion effect is executed, and the player is prevented from making a false guess that [RAM clear processing is not executed]. be able to. Further, it is possible to limit the illegal increase in the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect even though the store side has executed the RAM clear process, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is excessively disadvantaged.

(Means 07-4)
As shown in the above embodiment, the execution of the first special suggestion effect may be restricted by skipping the process of determining whether or not the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction. .. According to such a configuration, in the variable display that reaches the relief time reduction, it is suggested that the RAM clear processing is not executed by executing the first special suggestion effect, and the relief time is reached. It is possible to prevent the improvement of special feeling and expectation from being unnecessarily suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

(Means 07-5)
As shown in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in FIG. 9-9, when the display result is "big hit" (YES in step S07TM1034), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect (step S07TM1038). Is skipping. Therefore, it is possible to limit the execution of the first special suggestion effect in the variable display in which the display result is determined to be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, in the variable display in which the display result is "big hit", it is suggested that the RAM clear processing is not executed by executing the first special suggestion effect, and the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent the improvement of the special feeling and the expectation for the thing from being unnecessarily suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest.

(Means 07-6)
As shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), when the first special suggestion effect is executed in the variation display that reaches the relief time reduction, the variation display is started at the timing 2 seconds have elapsed (T3). (At the timing of), the first special suggestion effect is executed, and at the timing 6 seconds after the start of the variation display (at the timing of T6, that is, at the special timing), the relief time reduction arrival effect is executed. ..

According to such a configuration, the first special suggestion effect can be executed at the timing before the rescue time reduction arrival effect that suggests (notifies) that the relief time has been reached is executed, and the first special suggestion effect can be executed. It is possible to prevent the interest of the person from being reduced.

(Means 07-7)
As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a “non-reach off” fluctuation pattern, two seconds have passed since the fluctuation display was started (at the timing of T2). 1 A special suggestion effect is being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of "out of normal reach", at the timing 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display (at the timing of T2), The first special suggestion effect is being executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off", the fluctuation display is started at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed (at the timing of T2). ), The first special suggestion effect is being executed. Therefore, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the first special suggestion effect is executed at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display, which is a common timing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution timing of the first special suggestion effect, make it easier for the player to recognize the timing during the variation display that should be noted, and enhance the effect of the first special suggestion effect. At the same time, it is not necessary to execute the process of determining the execution timing of the first special suggestion effect, and the processing load of the effect control can be reduced.

(Means 07-8)
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 60% to 100%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the 100th variation display after the big hit, the first special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 20 to 30%.

With such a configuration, when it is difficult to recognize information on the number of big hits (for example, the history of the number of big hits on the day displayed on a data counter or the like) (for example, a failure of the data counter, countermeasures by the store, etc.). ), The player can predict whether or not the RAM clear process is executed depending on the execution frequency of the first special suggestion effect, so that the player does not become excessively disadvantaged and the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating. be able to.

(Means 07-9)
As shown in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in FIG. 9-9, the high base flag at the time of restoration indicating that the game state was the high base state (time reduction state A, time reduction state B, probability change state) at the time of turning on the power is set. When it is set (YES in step S07TM1036), the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect (step S07TM1038) is skipped. Therefore, when the gaming state is controlled to the high base state when the power is turned on, the execution of the first special suggestion effect can be restricted in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on.

According to such a configuration, when the power is turned on and the high base state is controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state, the first special suggestion effect is executed, which suggests whether or not the RAM clear process is executed. If this is done, it is possible to prevent the gambling from being excessively increased.

(Means 07-10)
As shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach", the timing before notifying that the display result is "out of reach" in the normal reach effect (combination of decorative symbols). (At the timing of T2 before the stop display), the first special suggestion effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach A off”, “super reach B off”), the display result is “ The first special suggestion effect is executed at the timing after notifying that it is "off" (at the timing of T6, which is the timing after the defeat effect is executed in the super reach A effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first special suggestion effect from reducing the interest in the super reach effect having a high expectation of a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 07-11)
As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2A) to (4A), after the first special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the A aspect is executed, and the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The special display 07TM150 of the above is changed to the special display 07TM150A of the A aspect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2B) to (4B), after the first special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the B aspect is executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The special display 07TM150 in the lower right is changed to the special display 07TM150B in the B mode.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (2C) to (4C), after the first special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, the special display change effect of the C aspect is executed, and the screen of the image display device 5 is executed. The special display 07TM150 in the lower right is changed to the special display 07TM160C in the C mode.

According to such a configuration, the suggestion that the RAM clear processing by the first special suggestion effect is not executed due to the change in the display mode of the special display continues even after the end of the first special suggestion effect. It can be done and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 07-12)
As shown in FIGS. 9-24, when the production stage changes (changes), the eye-catching effect is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (2A) to (2C), the eye-catching effect is executed. When the effect is executed, the second special suggestion effect is executed as a special suggestion effect that suggests that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 9-25, there are a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) as the effect mode of the second special suggestion effect, and when the second special suggestion effect of the A aspect is executed. Has a high ratio of the value of the relief time reduction counter being "700 to 800", and when the second special suggestion effect of the B aspect is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 300". When the second special suggestion effect of the C aspect is executed, the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction counter is high. Therefore, the ratio of which effect mode the second special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened by the effect mode of the second special suggestion effect, so that the second special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of anticipation, you can play until the stage change, which is the timing when the second special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is small by the second special suggestion effect, the player can be motivated to continue the game even after the stage change. ..

(Means 07-13)
As shown in FIGS. 9-27, in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on, it is suggested that the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine at the timing when the periodic light emission effect should be executed. The third special suggestion effect is executed as the special suggestion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 9-28, there are a plurality of production modes (emission color: blue, emission color: green, emission color: red) as the production mode of the third special suggestion effect, and the third special suggestion effect [blue]. When is executed, the ratio that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the third special suggestion effect [green] is executed, the relief time reduction counter The ratio that the value is "200 to 300" is high, and when the third special suggestion effect [red] is executed, the ratio that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 199" is high. ing. Therefore, the ratio of which effect mode the third special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened by the effect mode of the third special suggestion effect, so that the third special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of expectation, it is possible to play up to the 100th fluctuation after the power is turned on, which is the timing at which the third special suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is small by the third special suggestion effect, the game is continued even for the game after the third special suggestion effect is executed by the player. Can give motivation to do. Further, if a configuration is adopted in which the third special suggestion effect can be executed for every 100 fluctuations after the power is turned on, it is possible to further give the motivation to continue the game until the 100 × Nth fluctuation display is performed.

(Means 07-14)
As shown in FIGS. 9-29, when the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on is executed, the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine as a special suggestion effect. 4 A special suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-30, there are a plurality of effect modes (execution period: 10 variations, execution period: 20 variations, execution period: 25 variations) as the effect modes of the fourth special suggestion effect, and the fourth special suggestion effect. When [10 fluctuations] are executed, the ratio that the value of the relief time reduction counter is "700 to 800" is high, and when the third special suggestion effect [20 fluctuations] is executed, the ratio is high. When the ratio of the value of the relief time reduction counter is "200 to 300" is high and the third special suggestion effect [25 fluctuation] is executed, the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0 to 199". The ratio is high. Therefore, the ratio of which effect mode the fourth special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened by the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect, so that the fourth special suggestion effect is executed. With a sense of expectation, it is possible to play the first game after the power is turned on, which is the timing at which the fourth special suggestion effect is executed. That is, it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine whose variable display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on.

(Means 07-15)
As shown in FIGS. 9-31, when the reach is established, the character D and the normal dialogue display (characters of "chance ??", characters of "super heat !!", characters of "FEVER !!") are displayed. The RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine by displaying the normal dialogue notice effect that suggests the jackpot expectation level and the character D and special dialogue display (characters "deferred !?"). The fifth special suggestion effect as a special suggestion effect suggesting that it has not been performed is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C), the character D is displayed in the normal dialogue advance notice effect, and as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (2D), the fifth special suggestion effect is normal. Character D, which is the same as the dialogue notice effect, is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (2A) to (2C), in the normal dialogue notice effect, the normal dialogue display including the character information suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is displayed among the dialogue displays, and FIG. 9- As shown in 31 (2D), in the fifth special suggestion effect, a special serif display including character information suggesting that the RAM clear process is being executed is displayed among the serif displays.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control by using a common effect image in the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the fifth special suggestion effect in which the objects to be suggested are different.

(Means 07-16)
As shown in FIGS. 9-33, when the combination of decorative symbols whose display result is "off" is stopped and displayed in the 100th variation display after the power is turned on, the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The sixth special suggestion effect is executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-34, when the RAM clearing process is not executed, the sixth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 80%, while when the RAM clearing process is executed, the RAM clearing process is executed. The sixth special suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 30%. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing is not executed, the execution rate of the sixth special suggestion effect is higher than when the RAM clear processing is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed depending on whether or not the sixth special suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, even when the display result is "missing", the third is 6 You can play with a sense of expectation that the special suggestion effect will be executed. In addition, if it can be predicted that the RAM clear processing has been executed by the sixth special suggestion effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the sixth special suggestion effect is executed. Can be given.

(Means 07-17)
As shown in FIGS. 9-35, in the 100th fluctuation display after the power is turned on (the display result is "off"), the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on to the gaming machine when the gold active change effect is being executed. The seventh special suggestion effect is executed as a special suggestion effect suggesting that the process is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-36, when the gold active change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the red active change effect is executed. Further, when the display result is "off" and the gold active change effect is executed, the seventh special suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed depending on whether or not the seventh special suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the gold active change effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the display result is "off". In addition, if it can be predicted that the RAM clear processing has been executed by the 7th special suggestion effect, the player is motivated to continue the game even after the 7th special suggestion effect is executed. Can be given.

The feature unit 07TM described above includes each configuration shown below.

The gaming machine of means 07-1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
An update means (a part of the game control microcomputer 100 in which step 113IWS71 is performed) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction counter) when variable display is executed, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store the numerical information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. Clear processing) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the effect.
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the value of the special condition (relief time reduction counter) becomes ". When "0", that is, reaching the relief time reduction) is established, the special state (time reduction state B) can be controlled.
In the effect executing means (effect control CPU 120), the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is performed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. The numerical value stored in the storage means when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times) after the restart (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on). It is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (first special suggestion effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized.
As the effect mode of the special suggestion effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode).
The ratio of which effect mode the special suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the number of variable displays after the variable display is executed the specified number of times after the restart (100 after the power is turned on). The production mode of the first special suggestion effect is executed at a different ratio depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter in the variation display of the first time.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of variable displays until the special number of times is reached can be predicted depending on the effect mode of the special suggestion effect, and the interest of the special suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-2 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
An update means (a part of the game control microcomputer 100 in which step 113IWS71 is performed) capable of updating numerical information (relief time reduction counter) when variable display is executed, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store the numerical information when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM) capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. Clear processing) and
It is equipped with an effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the effect.
In the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (900 times) as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the value of the special condition (relief time reduction counter) becomes ". When "0", that is, reaching the relief time reduction) is established, the special state (time reduction state B) can be controlled.
In the effect executing means (effect control CPU 120), the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped, and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is performed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. The numerical value stored in the storage means when the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times) after the restart (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on). It is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (first special suggestion effect) that suggests that the information has not been initialized.
It is possible to execute the special suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the number of times the variable display is executed after the number of times the variable display is executed after the restart becomes the specific number of times (relief time reduction in the 100th variable display after the power is turned on). The execution rate of the first special suggestion effect differs depending on the value of the number of times counter)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of variable displays until the special number of times is reached can be predicted depending on the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect, and the interest of the special suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 08-1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store information about the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM clear processing) capable of initializing the information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. )When,
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect, and
Production state control that can be controlled to any of a plurality of types of production states including a first production state (sunny stage) and a second production state (cloudy stage) different from the first production state. Means (CPU 120 for effect control) and
The state control means (CPU 103) has a special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter reaches "0", that is, the relief time reduction is reached) based on the special number (900 times) of execution of the variable display. Can be controlled to the special state (time saving state B) when is satisfied.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the supply of electric power to the gaming machine, and restarts the supply of electric power to the gaming machine without initializing the information stored in the storage means. In this case (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on), a special suggestion effect (second special suggestion effect) suggesting that the information stored in the storage means has not been initialized can be executed. can be,
Depending on whether or not the information stored in the storage means has been initialized, the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect executed when the first effect state is controlled to the second effect state differs (RAM). Depending on whether or not the clear process is executed, the execution rate of the second special suggestion effect executed at the time of stage change when shifting from the sunny stage to the cloudy stage differs).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the game from the first effect state to the second effect state can be promoted, and the information stored in the storage means is not initialized by the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect. It can be predicted and the interest of special suggestion production can be improved.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means 08-1 may include a part of the configuration of the gaming machine of the means 07-1 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information), and the means 07- A part of the configuration of the two gaming machines (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information) may be provided.

The gaming machine of means 08-2 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display) and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means (CPU103) that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A, time saving state B (relief time saving state)) in which variable display is more easily executed than the normal state, and
A storage means (RAM 102 that stores the value of the relief time reduction counter) that can store information about the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
Initialization means (RAM clear processing) capable of initializing the information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed. )When,
An effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect, and
Production state control that can be controlled to any of a plurality of types of production states including a first production state (sunny stage) and a second production state (cloudy stage) different from the first production state. Means (CPU 120 for effect control) and
The state control means (CPU 103) has a special condition (the value of the relief time reduction counter reaches "0", that is, the relief time reduction is reached) based on the special number (900 times) of execution of the variable display. Can be controlled to the special state (time saving state B) when is satisfied.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) stops the supply of electric power to the gaming machine, and restarts the supply of electric power to the gaming machine without initializing the information stored in the storage means. In this case (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on), a special suggestion effect (second special suggestion effect) suggesting that the information stored in the storage means has not been initialized can be executed. can be,
As the effect mode of the special suggestion effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode).
Depending on whether or not the information stored in the storage means has been initialized, the special suggestion effect executed when the first effect state is controlled to the second effect state is executed in any effect mode. The production mode of the second special suggestion effect executed at the time of stage change when shifting from the sunny stage to the cloudy stage is selected at a different ratio depending on whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed. Ru)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game from the first effect state to the second effect state, and whether or not the information stored in the storage means is initialized by the effect mode of the special suggestion effect. Can be predicted, and the interest of special suggestion production can be improved.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means 08-1 may include a part of the configuration of the gaming machine of the means 07-1 (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information), and the means 07- A part of the configuration of the two gaming machines (for example, a configuration related to updating, storing, and initializing numerical information) may be provided.

The gaming machine of means 07-3 is
Means 07-1, Means 07-2, Means 08-1, Means 08-2.
After the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized by the initialization means, the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped without executing the variable display, and then the electric power to the gaming machine is stopped. When the supply is restarted, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted when the number of times the variable display is executed after the restart reaches the specified number of times (as shown in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, the power supply). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 899 in the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on, that is, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on without executing the fluctuation display even once after the RAM clear processing is executed. By setting the special suggestion effect restriction flag to, the process of determining whether or not to execute the first special suggestion effect is skipped.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the illegal execution of the special suggestion effect even though the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the player is excessively disadvantaged. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 07-4
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-3, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the variable display after the restart is displayed. When the number of executions becomes a specific number and the special condition is satisfied in the variable display, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted (when the 100th variable display is executed after the power is turned on, the relief time is shortened. If so, the first special suggestion effect is not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means 07-5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-4, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the variable display after the restart is displayed. When the number of executions becomes a specific number and is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted (displayed when the 100th variable display is executed after the power is turned on). If the result is a "big hit", the first special suggestion effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent suggesting that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized when the control is performed in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

The gaming machine of means 07-6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-5, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the notification effect for notifying that the special condition is satisfied can be executed at the first timing (relief at the timing (special timing) 6 seconds after the start of the variable display). We are performing a time-saving arrival production),
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the variable display after the restart is displayed. When the number of executions becomes a specific number and the special condition is satisfied in the variable display, the special suggestion effect can be executed at the second timing before the first timing (2 seconds after the variable display is started). The first special suggestion effect is executed at the elapsed timing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized before notifying that the special condition is satisfied, and it is possible to prevent the special suggestion effect from being less interesting. ..

The gaming machine of means 07-7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-6, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
Includes a first variable display pattern (variable pattern of "non-reach off") and a second variable display pattern (variable pattern of "super reach A off") having a longer variable display period than the first variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for performing step S111) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns is provided.
The effect executing means can execute the special suggestion effect at a common timing when the variable display is executed by the first variable display pattern and when the variable display is executed by the second variable display pattern. (Even if the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach off" or "super reach A off", the first special suggestion effect is performed at the timing when the fluctuation display is started and 2 seconds have passed. Running)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy for the player to recognize the timing to be noticed regardless of the variable display pattern, and the effect of the special suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-7, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
After the supply of electric power to the gaming machine was stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine was restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the control was performed in the advantageous state. In this case (when the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution rate of the special suggestion effect is set after the end of the advantageous state and before the control to the advantageous state. It is possible to reduce it (the execution rate of the first special suggestion effect is lower in the 100th fluctuation after the big hit than in the 100th fluctuation after the power is turned on).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to infer that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized due to the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 07-9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to means 07-8, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
As the special state, the state control means has a first special state (time saving state (low probability / high base state)) and a second special state (probability change state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first special state. (High accuracy / high base state)) and controllable,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed in the case where it is controlled to the normal state and the case where it is controlled to the first special state, while the second special state. When the state is controlled, the numerical information is not updated when the variable display is executed (the game control microcomputer 100 updates the relief time reduction counter when the probability change flag is not set). And, when the probability change flag is set, the relief time reduction counter is not updated),
After the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the effect executing means said. When controlled to the normal state, the special suggestion effect can be executed when the number of times the variable display is executed after restarting reaches the specified number of times (the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, and the normal state is restored. When controlled, the first special suggestion effect can be executed when the number of executions of the variable display reaches 100 times),
After the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the first special state is controlled. If this is done, the execution of the special suggestion effect can be restricted when the number of times the variable display is executed after restarting reaches the specified number of times (the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on, and the time is controlled to a shorter time. In this case, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 100, the first special suggestion effect is not executed based on the fact that the high base flag at the time of recovery is set.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from being excessively increased by executing the special suggestion effect when the special state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means 07-10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to means 07-9, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
A first specific suggestion effect (normal reach effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific suggestion effect (super reach A effect) in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first specific suggestion effect. ) And can be executed,
The special suggestion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings.
When the first specific suggestion effect is executed, the special suggestion effect can be executed at the first timing before the effect result of the first specific suggestion effect is notified (the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach"). When the normal reach effect is executed at a certain time, the first special suggestion effect is executed before the display result is notified that the display result is "off" in the normal reach effect).
When the second specific suggestion effect is executed, the special suggestion effect can be executed at the second timing after the effect result of the second specific suggestion effect is notified (the variation pattern is "super reach A is off". When the super reach A effect is executed, the first special suggestion effect is executed after being notified that the display result is "off" in the super reach A effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special suggestion effect from reducing the interest in the second specific suggestion effect, which is often controlled in an advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 07-11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-10, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
Equipped with a display means (image display device 5)
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to display special information corresponding to the number of variable displays executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed on the display means (special display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5). Is displayed),
When the special suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to change the mode of the special information (the mode of the special display is changed by executing the special display change effect after the first special suggestion effect is executed. Is changing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the special information, it is possible to continuously recognize the suggestion that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized, and the interest of the game is improved. can.

The gaming machine of means 07-12 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to means 07-11, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
An effect state control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling a plurality of types of effect states including a first effect state (sunny stage) and a second effect state (cloudy stage) different from the first effect state. Prepare,
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the special suggestion effect when the first effect state is controlled to the second effect state (when the stage is changed from a sunny stage to a cloudy stage). In addition to the eye-catching effect, the second special suggestion effect is being performed),
As the effect mode of the special suggestion effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (A mode, B mode, C mode).
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized or not, depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized. The ratio of which effect mode the special suggestion effect is executed is different (the effect mode of the second special suggestion effect is selected at a different ratio depending on whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game from the first effect state to the second effect state, and whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized by the effect mode of the special suggestion effect. Can be predicted, and the interest of special suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-13 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to means 07-12, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
When the number of times the variable display is executed after the restart becomes the specific number of times (100 times), the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) produces any one of a plurality of effect modes including the specific mode. The special suggestion effect can be executed in the embodiment (the third special suggestion effect can be executed in 100 fluctuation displays after the power is turned on).
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized or not, depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized. The rate at which the special suggestion effect of the specific mode is executed is different (the effect mode of the third special suggestion effect is selected at a different rate depending on whether or not the RAM clear process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game until the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, and whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized by the execution frequency of the special suggestion effect of the specific aspect. Can be predicted, and the interest of special suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 07-14 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-13, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the special suggestion effect during a predetermined period including the first variable display after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (after the power is turned on). The fourth special suggestion effect is executed from the first fluctuation display to multiple fluctuation displays),
As the effect mode of the special suggestion effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (execution period: 10 variations, 20 variations, 25 variations).
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized or not, depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized. The ratio of which effect mode the special suggestion effect is executed is different (the effect mode of the fourth special suggestion effect is selected at a different ratio depending on whether or not the RAM clear processing is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to promote the game to the game machine in which the first variable display after the power supply to the game machine is started is not executed, and the game is stored in the storage means by the effect mode of the special suggestion effect. It is possible to predict whether or not the numerical information has been initialized, and it is possible to improve the interest of special suggestion production.

The gaming machine of means 07-15 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1 to means 07-14, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is an effect suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state, and includes a first effect element (character D) and a second effect element (normal line display among dialogue displays) different from the first effect element. It is possible to execute a specific effect (normal dialogue notice effect),
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means (RAM clear processing is executed). The special suggestion effect (fifth special suggestion effect (special dialogue)) includes the first effect element (character D) and the second effect element (special dialogue display among the dialogue displays). It can be executed as a notice production)),
The first effect element in the specific effect and the first effect element in the special suggestion effect are common embodiments.
The second effect element in the specific effect and the second effect element in the special suggestion effect have different modes (the character D is common between the normal dialogue advance notice effect and the fifth special suggestion effect, but is normal. The normal dialogue display is displayed in the dialogue advance notice production, and the special dialogue display is displayed in the 5th special suggestion production.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first effect element is standardized and the second effect element is different between the specific effect and the special suggestion effect, so that the processing load of the effect control can be reduced and the interest of the game is improved. can.

The gaming machine of means 07-16 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-15, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
It is equipped with a variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute variable display of identification information (variable display of decorative patterns).
When the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol combination "777" or the like), the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) can be controlled.
As display results different from the specific display result, a first display result (such as "212" which does not include "7" in the middle symbol as an outlier symbol combination) and a second display result different from the first display result ( As a combination of out-of-order symbols, there are "272" etc. including "7" in the middle symbol.
The effect executing means can execute an effect of displaying the second display result as the special suggestion effect (by stopping and displaying "7" in the middle symbol, it is suggested that the RAM clear process is not executed. (Implemented as the 6th special suggestion production),
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized or not, depending on whether or not the numerical information stored in the storage means is initialized. The execution rate of the effect for displaying the second display result is different (the execution rate of the sixth special suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not the RAM clear process is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by paying attention to the display result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the advantageous state is not controlled.

The gaming machine of means 07-17 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means 07-1, means 07-16, means 08-1, and means 08-2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is
The first specific suggestion effect (red active change effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, and the second specific suggestion effect (gold active) that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first specific suggestion effect. Change production) and can be executed,
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and then the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means (RAM clear processing is executed). (If not), it is suggested that the numerical information stored in the storage means is not initialized when the advantageous state is not controlled after the second specific suggestion effect is executed. (If the display result is "missing" after the gold active change effect is executed, the gold active change effect is executed as the 7th special suggestion effect).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment when the second specific suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state after being executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
An update method that can update numerical information when variable display is executed,
A storage means capable of storing the numerical information when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped,
An initialization means capable of initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is resumed.
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display. ,
The effect executing means is when the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means. When the number of times the variable display is executed after resumption reaches a specific number of times, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests that the numerical information stored in the storage means has not been initialized.
When the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is stopped and the supply of electric power to the gaming machine is restarted without initializing the numerical information stored in the storage means, the variable display after the restart is performed. When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the specific value in the variable display in which the number of times of execution is the specific number of times, the special suggestion effect is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images